* config/tc-hppa.c (pa_ip): Limit unit conditions for uxor to those
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / config / tc-hppa.c
1 /* tc-hppa.c -- Assemble for the PA
2 Copyright 1989, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
3 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2012
4 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5
6 This file is part of GAS, the GNU Assembler.
7
8 GAS is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
9 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
10 the Free Software Foundation; either version 3, or (at your option)
11 any later version.
12
13 GAS is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
14 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
15 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
16 GNU General Public License for more details.
17
18 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
19 along with GAS; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
20 Software Foundation, 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
21 02110-1301, USA. */
22
23 /* HP PA-RISC support was contributed by the Center for Software Science
24 at the University of Utah. */
25
26 #include "as.h"
27 #include "safe-ctype.h"
28 #include "subsegs.h"
29 #include "dw2gencfi.h"
30
31 #include "bfd/libhppa.h"
32
33 /* Be careful, this file includes data *declarations*. */
34 #include "opcode/hppa.h"
35
36 #if defined (OBJ_ELF) && defined (OBJ_SOM)
37 error only one of OBJ_ELF and OBJ_SOM can be defined
38 #endif
39
40 /* If we are using ELF, then we probably can support dwarf2 debug
41 records. Furthermore, if we are supporting dwarf2 debug records,
42 then we want to use the assembler support for compact line numbers. */
43 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
44 #include "dwarf2dbg.h"
45
46 /* A "convenient" place to put object file dependencies which do
47 not need to be seen outside of tc-hppa.c. */
48
49 /* Object file formats specify relocation types. */
50 typedef enum elf_hppa_reloc_type reloc_type;
51
52 /* Object file formats specify BFD symbol types. */
53 typedef elf_symbol_type obj_symbol_type;
54 #define symbol_arg_reloc_info(sym)\
55 (((obj_symbol_type *) symbol_get_bfdsym (sym))->tc_data.hppa_arg_reloc)
56
57 #if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
58 /* How to generate a relocation. */
59 #define hppa_gen_reloc_type _bfd_elf64_hppa_gen_reloc_type
60 #define elf_hppa_reloc_final_type elf64_hppa_reloc_final_type
61 #else
62 #define hppa_gen_reloc_type _bfd_elf32_hppa_gen_reloc_type
63 #define elf_hppa_reloc_final_type elf32_hppa_reloc_final_type
64 #endif
65
66 /* ELF objects can have versions, but apparently do not have anywhere
67 to store a copyright string. */
68 #define obj_version obj_elf_version
69 #define obj_copyright obj_elf_version
70
71 #define UNWIND_SECTION_NAME ".PARISC.unwind"
72 #endif /* OBJ_ELF */
73
74 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
75 /* Names of various debugging spaces/subspaces. */
76 #define GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME "$GDB_DEBUG$"
77 #define GDB_STRINGS_SUBSPACE_NAME "$GDB_STRINGS$"
78 #define GDB_SYMBOLS_SUBSPACE_NAME "$GDB_SYMBOLS$"
79 #define UNWIND_SECTION_NAME "$UNWIND$"
80
81 /* Object file formats specify relocation types. */
82 typedef int reloc_type;
83
84 /* SOM objects can have both a version string and a copyright string. */
85 #define obj_version obj_som_version
86 #define obj_copyright obj_som_copyright
87
88 /* How to generate a relocation. */
89 #define hppa_gen_reloc_type hppa_som_gen_reloc_type
90
91 /* Object file formats specify BFD symbol types. */
92 typedef som_symbol_type obj_symbol_type;
93 #define symbol_arg_reloc_info(sym)\
94 (((obj_symbol_type *) symbol_get_bfdsym (sym))->tc_data.ap.hppa_arg_reloc)
95
96 /* This apparently isn't in older versions of hpux reloc.h. */
97 #ifndef R_DLT_REL
98 #define R_DLT_REL 0x78
99 #endif
100
101 #ifndef R_N0SEL
102 #define R_N0SEL 0xd8
103 #endif
104
105 #ifndef R_N1SEL
106 #define R_N1SEL 0xd9
107 #endif
108 #endif /* OBJ_SOM */
109
110 #if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
111 #define DEFAULT_LEVEL 25
112 #else
113 #define DEFAULT_LEVEL 10
114 #endif
115
116 /* Various structures and types used internally in tc-hppa.c. */
117
118 /* Unwind table and descriptor. FIXME: Sync this with GDB version. */
119
120 struct unwind_desc
121 {
122 unsigned int cannot_unwind:1;
123 unsigned int millicode:1;
124 unsigned int millicode_save_rest:1;
125 unsigned int region_desc:2;
126 unsigned int save_sr:2;
127 unsigned int entry_fr:4;
128 unsigned int entry_gr:5;
129 unsigned int args_stored:1;
130 unsigned int call_fr:5;
131 unsigned int call_gr:5;
132 unsigned int save_sp:1;
133 unsigned int save_rp:1;
134 unsigned int save_rp_in_frame:1;
135 unsigned int extn_ptr_defined:1;
136 unsigned int cleanup_defined:1;
137
138 unsigned int hpe_interrupt_marker:1;
139 unsigned int hpux_interrupt_marker:1;
140 unsigned int reserved:3;
141 unsigned int frame_size:27;
142 };
143
144 /* We can't rely on compilers placing bitfields in any particular
145 place, so use these macros when dumping unwind descriptors to
146 object files. */
147 #define UNWIND_LOW32(U) \
148 (((U)->cannot_unwind << 31) \
149 | ((U)->millicode << 30) \
150 | ((U)->millicode_save_rest << 29) \
151 | ((U)->region_desc << 27) \
152 | ((U)->save_sr << 25) \
153 | ((U)->entry_fr << 21) \
154 | ((U)->entry_gr << 16) \
155 | ((U)->args_stored << 15) \
156 | ((U)->call_fr << 10) \
157 | ((U)->call_gr << 5) \
158 | ((U)->save_sp << 4) \
159 | ((U)->save_rp << 3) \
160 | ((U)->save_rp_in_frame << 2) \
161 | ((U)->extn_ptr_defined << 1) \
162 | ((U)->cleanup_defined << 0))
163
164 #define UNWIND_HIGH32(U) \
165 (((U)->hpe_interrupt_marker << 31) \
166 | ((U)->hpux_interrupt_marker << 30) \
167 | ((U)->frame_size << 0))
168
169 struct unwind_table
170 {
171 /* Starting and ending offsets of the region described by
172 descriptor. */
173 unsigned int start_offset;
174 unsigned int end_offset;
175 struct unwind_desc descriptor;
176 };
177
178 /* This structure is used by the .callinfo, .enter, .leave pseudo-ops to
179 control the entry and exit code they generate. It is also used in
180 creation of the correct stack unwind descriptors.
181
182 NOTE: GAS does not support .enter and .leave for the generation of
183 prologues and epilogues. FIXME.
184
185 The fields in structure roughly correspond to the arguments available on the
186 .callinfo pseudo-op. */
187
188 struct call_info
189 {
190 /* The unwind descriptor being built. */
191 struct unwind_table ci_unwind;
192
193 /* Name of this function. */
194 symbolS *start_symbol;
195
196 /* (temporary) symbol used to mark the end of this function. */
197 symbolS *end_symbol;
198
199 /* Next entry in the chain. */
200 struct call_info *ci_next;
201 };
202
203 /* Operand formats for FP instructions. Note not all FP instructions
204 allow all four formats to be used (for example fmpysub only allows
205 SGL and DBL). */
206 typedef enum
207 {
208 SGL, DBL, ILLEGAL_FMT, QUAD, W, UW, DW, UDW, QW, UQW
209 }
210 fp_operand_format;
211
212 /* This fully describes the symbol types which may be attached to
213 an EXPORT or IMPORT directive. Only SOM uses this formation
214 (ELF has no need for it). */
215 typedef enum
216 {
217 SYMBOL_TYPE_UNKNOWN,
218 SYMBOL_TYPE_ABSOLUTE,
219 SYMBOL_TYPE_CODE,
220 SYMBOL_TYPE_DATA,
221 SYMBOL_TYPE_ENTRY,
222 SYMBOL_TYPE_MILLICODE,
223 SYMBOL_TYPE_PLABEL,
224 SYMBOL_TYPE_PRI_PROG,
225 SYMBOL_TYPE_SEC_PROG,
226 }
227 pa_symbol_type;
228
229 /* This structure contains information needed to assemble
230 individual instructions. */
231 struct pa_it
232 {
233 /* Holds the opcode after parsing by pa_ip. */
234 unsigned long opcode;
235
236 /* Holds an expression associated with the current instruction. */
237 expressionS exp;
238
239 /* Does this instruction use PC-relative addressing. */
240 int pcrel;
241
242 /* Floating point formats for operand1 and operand2. */
243 fp_operand_format fpof1;
244 fp_operand_format fpof2;
245
246 /* Whether or not we saw a truncation request on an fcnv insn. */
247 int trunc;
248
249 /* Holds the field selector for this instruction
250 (for example L%, LR%, etc). */
251 long field_selector;
252
253 /* Holds any argument relocation bits associated with this
254 instruction. (instruction should be some sort of call). */
255 unsigned int arg_reloc;
256
257 /* The format specification for this instruction. */
258 int format;
259
260 /* The relocation (if any) associated with this instruction. */
261 reloc_type reloc;
262 };
263
264 /* PA-89 floating point registers are arranged like this:
265
266 +--------------+--------------+
267 | 0 or 16L | 16 or 16R |
268 +--------------+--------------+
269 | 1 or 17L | 17 or 17R |
270 +--------------+--------------+
271 | | |
272
273 . . .
274 . . .
275 . . .
276
277 | | |
278 +--------------+--------------+
279 | 14 or 30L | 30 or 30R |
280 +--------------+--------------+
281 | 15 or 31L | 31 or 31R |
282 +--------------+--------------+ */
283
284 /* Additional information needed to build argument relocation stubs. */
285 struct call_desc
286 {
287 /* The argument relocation specification. */
288 unsigned int arg_reloc;
289
290 /* Number of arguments. */
291 unsigned int arg_count;
292 };
293
294 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
295 /* This structure defines an entry in the subspace dictionary
296 chain. */
297
298 struct subspace_dictionary_chain
299 {
300 /* Nonzero if this space has been defined by the user code. */
301 unsigned int ssd_defined;
302
303 /* Name of this subspace. */
304 char *ssd_name;
305
306 /* GAS segment and subsegment associated with this subspace. */
307 asection *ssd_seg;
308 int ssd_subseg;
309
310 /* Next space in the subspace dictionary chain. */
311 struct subspace_dictionary_chain *ssd_next;
312 };
313
314 typedef struct subspace_dictionary_chain ssd_chain_struct;
315
316 /* This structure defines an entry in the subspace dictionary
317 chain. */
318
319 struct space_dictionary_chain
320 {
321 /* Nonzero if this space has been defined by the user code or
322 as a default space. */
323 unsigned int sd_defined;
324
325 /* Nonzero if this spaces has been defined by the user code. */
326 unsigned int sd_user_defined;
327
328 /* The space number (or index). */
329 unsigned int sd_spnum;
330
331 /* The name of this subspace. */
332 char *sd_name;
333
334 /* GAS segment to which this subspace corresponds. */
335 asection *sd_seg;
336
337 /* Current subsegment number being used. */
338 int sd_last_subseg;
339
340 /* The chain of subspaces contained within this space. */
341 ssd_chain_struct *sd_subspaces;
342
343 /* The next entry in the space dictionary chain. */
344 struct space_dictionary_chain *sd_next;
345 };
346
347 typedef struct space_dictionary_chain sd_chain_struct;
348
349 /* This structure defines attributes of the default subspace
350 dictionary entries. */
351
352 struct default_subspace_dict
353 {
354 /* Name of the subspace. */
355 char *name;
356
357 /* FIXME. Is this still needed? */
358 char defined;
359
360 /* Nonzero if this subspace is loadable. */
361 char loadable;
362
363 /* Nonzero if this subspace contains only code. */
364 char code_only;
365
366 /* Nonzero if this is a comdat subspace. */
367 char comdat;
368
369 /* Nonzero if this is a common subspace. */
370 char common;
371
372 /* Nonzero if this is a common subspace which allows symbols
373 to be multiply defined. */
374 char dup_common;
375
376 /* Nonzero if this subspace should be zero filled. */
377 char zero;
378
379 /* Sort key for this subspace. */
380 unsigned char sort;
381
382 /* Access control bits for this subspace. Can represent RWX access
383 as well as privilege level changes for gateways. */
384 int access;
385
386 /* Index of containing space. */
387 int space_index;
388
389 /* Alignment (in bytes) of this subspace. */
390 int alignment;
391
392 /* Quadrant within space where this subspace should be loaded. */
393 int quadrant;
394
395 /* An index into the default spaces array. */
396 int def_space_index;
397
398 /* Subsegment associated with this subspace. */
399 subsegT subsegment;
400 };
401
402 /* This structure defines attributes of the default space
403 dictionary entries. */
404
405 struct default_space_dict
406 {
407 /* Name of the space. */
408 char *name;
409
410 /* Space number. It is possible to identify spaces within
411 assembly code numerically! */
412 int spnum;
413
414 /* Nonzero if this space is loadable. */
415 char loadable;
416
417 /* Nonzero if this space is "defined". FIXME is still needed */
418 char defined;
419
420 /* Nonzero if this space can not be shared. */
421 char private;
422
423 /* Sort key for this space. */
424 unsigned char sort;
425
426 /* Segment associated with this space. */
427 asection *segment;
428 };
429 #endif
430
431 /* Structure for previous label tracking. Needed so that alignments,
432 callinfo declarations, etc can be easily attached to a particular
433 label. */
434 typedef struct label_symbol_struct
435 {
436 struct symbol *lss_label;
437 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
438 sd_chain_struct *lss_space;
439 #endif
440 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
441 segT lss_segment;
442 #endif
443 struct label_symbol_struct *lss_next;
444 }
445 label_symbol_struct;
446
447 /* Extra information needed to perform fixups (relocations) on the PA. */
448 struct hppa_fix_struct
449 {
450 /* The field selector. */
451 enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt fx_r_field;
452
453 /* Type of fixup. */
454 int fx_r_type;
455
456 /* Format of fixup. */
457 int fx_r_format;
458
459 /* Argument relocation bits. */
460 unsigned int fx_arg_reloc;
461
462 /* The segment this fixup appears in. */
463 segT segment;
464 };
465
466 /* Structure to hold information about predefined registers. */
467
468 struct pd_reg
469 {
470 char *name;
471 int value;
472 };
473
474 /* This structure defines the mapping from a FP condition string
475 to a condition number which can be recorded in an instruction. */
476 struct fp_cond_map
477 {
478 char *string;
479 int cond;
480 };
481
482 /* This structure defines a mapping from a field selector
483 string to a field selector type. */
484 struct selector_entry
485 {
486 char *prefix;
487 int field_selector;
488 };
489
490 /* Prototypes for functions local to tc-hppa.c. */
491
492 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
493 static void pa_check_current_space_and_subspace (void);
494 #endif
495
496 #if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
497 static void pa_text (int);
498 static void pa_data (int);
499 static void pa_comm (int);
500 #endif
501 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
502 static int exact_log2 (int);
503 static void pa_compiler (int);
504 static void pa_align (int);
505 static void pa_space (int);
506 static void pa_spnum (int);
507 static void pa_subspace (int);
508 static sd_chain_struct *create_new_space (char *, int, int,
509 int, int, int,
510 asection *, int);
511 static ssd_chain_struct *create_new_subspace (sd_chain_struct *,
512 char *, int, int,
513 int, int, int, int,
514 int, int, int, int,
515 int, asection *);
516 static ssd_chain_struct *update_subspace (sd_chain_struct *,
517 char *, int, int, int,
518 int, int, int, int,
519 int, int, int, int,
520 asection *);
521 static sd_chain_struct *is_defined_space (char *);
522 static ssd_chain_struct *is_defined_subspace (char *);
523 static sd_chain_struct *pa_segment_to_space (asection *);
524 static ssd_chain_struct *pa_subsegment_to_subspace (asection *,
525 subsegT);
526 static sd_chain_struct *pa_find_space_by_number (int);
527 static unsigned int pa_subspace_start (sd_chain_struct *, int);
528 static sd_chain_struct *pa_parse_space_stmt (char *, int);
529 #endif
530
531 /* File and globally scoped variable declarations. */
532
533 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
534 /* Root and final entry in the space chain. */
535 static sd_chain_struct *space_dict_root;
536 static sd_chain_struct *space_dict_last;
537
538 /* The current space and subspace. */
539 static sd_chain_struct *current_space;
540 static ssd_chain_struct *current_subspace;
541 #endif
542
543 /* Root of the call_info chain. */
544 static struct call_info *call_info_root;
545
546 /* The last call_info (for functions) structure
547 seen so it can be associated with fixups and
548 function labels. */
549 static struct call_info *last_call_info;
550
551 /* The last call description (for actual calls). */
552 static struct call_desc last_call_desc;
553
554 /* handle of the OPCODE hash table */
555 static struct hash_control *op_hash = NULL;
556
557 /* These characters can be suffixes of opcode names and they may be
558 followed by meaningful whitespace. We don't include `,' and `!'
559 as they never appear followed by meaningful whitespace. */
560 const char hppa_symbol_chars[] = "*?=<>";
561
562 /* This array holds the chars that only start a comment at the beginning of
563 a line. If the line seems to have the form '# 123 filename'
564 .line and .file directives will appear in the pre-processed output.
565
566 Note that input_file.c hand checks for '#' at the beginning of the
567 first line of the input file. This is because the compiler outputs
568 #NO_APP at the beginning of its output.
569
570 Also note that C style comments will always work. */
571 const char line_comment_chars[] = "#";
572
573 /* This array holds the chars that always start a comment. If the
574 pre-processor is disabled, these aren't very useful. */
575 const char comment_chars[] = ";";
576
577 /* This array holds the characters which act as line separators. */
578 const char line_separator_chars[] = "!";
579
580 /* Chars that can be used to separate mant from exp in floating point nums. */
581 const char EXP_CHARS[] = "eE";
582
583 /* Chars that mean this number is a floating point constant.
584 As in 0f12.456 or 0d1.2345e12.
585
586 Be aware that MAXIMUM_NUMBER_OF_CHARS_FOR_FLOAT may have to be
587 changed in read.c. Ideally it shouldn't have to know about it
588 at all, but nothing is ideal around here. */
589 const char FLT_CHARS[] = "rRsSfFdDxXpP";
590
591 static struct pa_it the_insn;
592
593 /* Points to the end of an expression just parsed by get_expression
594 and friends. FIXME. This shouldn't be handled with a file-global
595 variable. */
596 static char *expr_end;
597
598 /* Nonzero if a .callinfo appeared within the current procedure. */
599 static int callinfo_found;
600
601 /* Nonzero if the assembler is currently within a .entry/.exit pair. */
602 static int within_entry_exit;
603
604 /* Nonzero if the assembler is currently within a procedure definition. */
605 static int within_procedure;
606
607 /* Handle on structure which keep track of the last symbol
608 seen in each subspace. */
609 static label_symbol_struct *label_symbols_rootp = NULL;
610
611 /* Holds the last field selector. */
612 static int hppa_field_selector;
613
614 /* Nonzero when strict matching is enabled. Zero otherwise.
615
616 Each opcode in the table has a flag which indicates whether or
617 not strict matching should be enabled for that instruction.
618
619 Mainly, strict causes errors to be ignored when a match failure
620 occurs. However, it also affects the parsing of register fields
621 by pa_parse_number. */
622 static int strict;
623
624 /* pa_parse_number returns values in `pa_number'. Mostly
625 pa_parse_number is used to return a register number, with floating
626 point registers being numbered from FP_REG_BASE upwards.
627 The bit specified with FP_REG_RSEL is set if the floating point
628 register has a `r' suffix. */
629 #define FP_REG_BASE 64
630 #define FP_REG_RSEL 128
631 static int pa_number;
632
633 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
634 /* A dummy bfd symbol so that all relocations have symbols of some kind. */
635 static symbolS *dummy_symbol;
636 #endif
637
638 /* Nonzero if errors are to be printed. */
639 static int print_errors = 1;
640
641 /* List of registers that are pre-defined:
642
643 Each general register has one predefined name of the form
644 %r<REGNUM> which has the value <REGNUM>.
645
646 Space and control registers are handled in a similar manner,
647 but use %sr<REGNUM> and %cr<REGNUM> as their predefined names.
648
649 Likewise for the floating point registers, but of the form
650 %fr<REGNUM>. Floating point registers have additional predefined
651 names with 'L' and 'R' suffixes (e.g. %fr19L, %fr19R) which
652 again have the value <REGNUM>.
653
654 Many registers also have synonyms:
655
656 %r26 - %r23 have %arg0 - %arg3 as synonyms
657 %r28 - %r29 have %ret0 - %ret1 as synonyms
658 %fr4 - %fr7 have %farg0 - %farg3 as synonyms
659 %r30 has %sp as a synonym
660 %r27 has %dp as a synonym
661 %r2 has %rp as a synonym
662
663 Almost every control register has a synonym; they are not listed
664 here for brevity.
665
666 The table is sorted. Suitable for searching by a binary search. */
667
668 static const struct pd_reg pre_defined_registers[] =
669 {
670 {"%arg0", 26},
671 {"%arg1", 25},
672 {"%arg2", 24},
673 {"%arg3", 23},
674 {"%cr0", 0},
675 {"%cr10", 10},
676 {"%cr11", 11},
677 {"%cr12", 12},
678 {"%cr13", 13},
679 {"%cr14", 14},
680 {"%cr15", 15},
681 {"%cr16", 16},
682 {"%cr17", 17},
683 {"%cr18", 18},
684 {"%cr19", 19},
685 {"%cr20", 20},
686 {"%cr21", 21},
687 {"%cr22", 22},
688 {"%cr23", 23},
689 {"%cr24", 24},
690 {"%cr25", 25},
691 {"%cr26", 26},
692 {"%cr27", 27},
693 {"%cr28", 28},
694 {"%cr29", 29},
695 {"%cr30", 30},
696 {"%cr31", 31},
697 {"%cr8", 8},
698 {"%cr9", 9},
699 {"%dp", 27},
700 {"%eiem", 15},
701 {"%eirr", 23},
702 {"%farg0", 4 + FP_REG_BASE},
703 {"%farg1", 5 + FP_REG_BASE},
704 {"%farg2", 6 + FP_REG_BASE},
705 {"%farg3", 7 + FP_REG_BASE},
706 {"%fr0", 0 + FP_REG_BASE},
707 {"%fr0l", 0 + FP_REG_BASE},
708 {"%fr0r", 0 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
709 {"%fr1", 1 + FP_REG_BASE},
710 {"%fr10", 10 + FP_REG_BASE},
711 {"%fr10l", 10 + FP_REG_BASE},
712 {"%fr10r", 10 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
713 {"%fr11", 11 + FP_REG_BASE},
714 {"%fr11l", 11 + FP_REG_BASE},
715 {"%fr11r", 11 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
716 {"%fr12", 12 + FP_REG_BASE},
717 {"%fr12l", 12 + FP_REG_BASE},
718 {"%fr12r", 12 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
719 {"%fr13", 13 + FP_REG_BASE},
720 {"%fr13l", 13 + FP_REG_BASE},
721 {"%fr13r", 13 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
722 {"%fr14", 14 + FP_REG_BASE},
723 {"%fr14l", 14 + FP_REG_BASE},
724 {"%fr14r", 14 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
725 {"%fr15", 15 + FP_REG_BASE},
726 {"%fr15l", 15 + FP_REG_BASE},
727 {"%fr15r", 15 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
728 {"%fr16", 16 + FP_REG_BASE},
729 {"%fr16l", 16 + FP_REG_BASE},
730 {"%fr16r", 16 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
731 {"%fr17", 17 + FP_REG_BASE},
732 {"%fr17l", 17 + FP_REG_BASE},
733 {"%fr17r", 17 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
734 {"%fr18", 18 + FP_REG_BASE},
735 {"%fr18l", 18 + FP_REG_BASE},
736 {"%fr18r", 18 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
737 {"%fr19", 19 + FP_REG_BASE},
738 {"%fr19l", 19 + FP_REG_BASE},
739 {"%fr19r", 19 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
740 {"%fr1l", 1 + FP_REG_BASE},
741 {"%fr1r", 1 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
742 {"%fr2", 2 + FP_REG_BASE},
743 {"%fr20", 20 + FP_REG_BASE},
744 {"%fr20l", 20 + FP_REG_BASE},
745 {"%fr20r", 20 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
746 {"%fr21", 21 + FP_REG_BASE},
747 {"%fr21l", 21 + FP_REG_BASE},
748 {"%fr21r", 21 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
749 {"%fr22", 22 + FP_REG_BASE},
750 {"%fr22l", 22 + FP_REG_BASE},
751 {"%fr22r", 22 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
752 {"%fr23", 23 + FP_REG_BASE},
753 {"%fr23l", 23 + FP_REG_BASE},
754 {"%fr23r", 23 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
755 {"%fr24", 24 + FP_REG_BASE},
756 {"%fr24l", 24 + FP_REG_BASE},
757 {"%fr24r", 24 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
758 {"%fr25", 25 + FP_REG_BASE},
759 {"%fr25l", 25 + FP_REG_BASE},
760 {"%fr25r", 25 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
761 {"%fr26", 26 + FP_REG_BASE},
762 {"%fr26l", 26 + FP_REG_BASE},
763 {"%fr26r", 26 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
764 {"%fr27", 27 + FP_REG_BASE},
765 {"%fr27l", 27 + FP_REG_BASE},
766 {"%fr27r", 27 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
767 {"%fr28", 28 + FP_REG_BASE},
768 {"%fr28l", 28 + FP_REG_BASE},
769 {"%fr28r", 28 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
770 {"%fr29", 29 + FP_REG_BASE},
771 {"%fr29l", 29 + FP_REG_BASE},
772 {"%fr29r", 29 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
773 {"%fr2l", 2 + FP_REG_BASE},
774 {"%fr2r", 2 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
775 {"%fr3", 3 + FP_REG_BASE},
776 {"%fr30", 30 + FP_REG_BASE},
777 {"%fr30l", 30 + FP_REG_BASE},
778 {"%fr30r", 30 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
779 {"%fr31", 31 + FP_REG_BASE},
780 {"%fr31l", 31 + FP_REG_BASE},
781 {"%fr31r", 31 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
782 {"%fr3l", 3 + FP_REG_BASE},
783 {"%fr3r", 3 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
784 {"%fr4", 4 + FP_REG_BASE},
785 {"%fr4l", 4 + FP_REG_BASE},
786 {"%fr4r", 4 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
787 {"%fr5", 5 + FP_REG_BASE},
788 {"%fr5l", 5 + FP_REG_BASE},
789 {"%fr5r", 5 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
790 {"%fr6", 6 + FP_REG_BASE},
791 {"%fr6l", 6 + FP_REG_BASE},
792 {"%fr6r", 6 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
793 {"%fr7", 7 + FP_REG_BASE},
794 {"%fr7l", 7 + FP_REG_BASE},
795 {"%fr7r", 7 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
796 {"%fr8", 8 + FP_REG_BASE},
797 {"%fr8l", 8 + FP_REG_BASE},
798 {"%fr8r", 8 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
799 {"%fr9", 9 + FP_REG_BASE},
800 {"%fr9l", 9 + FP_REG_BASE},
801 {"%fr9r", 9 + FP_REG_BASE + FP_REG_RSEL},
802 {"%fret", 4},
803 {"%hta", 25},
804 {"%iir", 19},
805 {"%ior", 21},
806 {"%ipsw", 22},
807 {"%isr", 20},
808 {"%itmr", 16},
809 {"%iva", 14},
810 #if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
811 {"%mrp", 2},
812 #else
813 {"%mrp", 31},
814 #endif
815 {"%pcoq", 18},
816 {"%pcsq", 17},
817 {"%pidr1", 8},
818 {"%pidr2", 9},
819 {"%pidr3", 12},
820 {"%pidr4", 13},
821 {"%ppda", 24},
822 {"%r0", 0},
823 {"%r1", 1},
824 {"%r10", 10},
825 {"%r11", 11},
826 {"%r12", 12},
827 {"%r13", 13},
828 {"%r14", 14},
829 {"%r15", 15},
830 {"%r16", 16},
831 {"%r17", 17},
832 {"%r18", 18},
833 {"%r19", 19},
834 {"%r2", 2},
835 {"%r20", 20},
836 {"%r21", 21},
837 {"%r22", 22},
838 {"%r23", 23},
839 {"%r24", 24},
840 {"%r25", 25},
841 {"%r26", 26},
842 {"%r27", 27},
843 {"%r28", 28},
844 {"%r29", 29},
845 {"%r3", 3},
846 {"%r30", 30},
847 {"%r31", 31},
848 {"%r4", 4},
849 {"%r5", 5},
850 {"%r6", 6},
851 {"%r7", 7},
852 {"%r8", 8},
853 {"%r9", 9},
854 {"%rctr", 0},
855 {"%ret0", 28},
856 {"%ret1", 29},
857 {"%rp", 2},
858 {"%sar", 11},
859 {"%sp", 30},
860 {"%sr0", 0},
861 {"%sr1", 1},
862 {"%sr2", 2},
863 {"%sr3", 3},
864 {"%sr4", 4},
865 {"%sr5", 5},
866 {"%sr6", 6},
867 {"%sr7", 7},
868 {"%t1", 22},
869 {"%t2", 21},
870 {"%t3", 20},
871 {"%t4", 19},
872 {"%tf1", 11},
873 {"%tf2", 10},
874 {"%tf3", 9},
875 {"%tf4", 8},
876 {"%tr0", 24},
877 {"%tr1", 25},
878 {"%tr2", 26},
879 {"%tr3", 27},
880 {"%tr4", 28},
881 {"%tr5", 29},
882 {"%tr6", 30},
883 {"%tr7", 31}
884 };
885
886 /* This table is sorted by order of the length of the string. This is
887 so we check for <> before we check for <. If we had a <> and checked
888 for < first, we would get a false match. */
889 static const struct fp_cond_map fp_cond_map[] =
890 {
891 {"false?", 0},
892 {"false", 1},
893 {"true?", 30},
894 {"true", 31},
895 {"!<=>", 3},
896 {"!?>=", 8},
897 {"!?<=", 16},
898 {"!<>", 7},
899 {"!>=", 11},
900 {"!?>", 12},
901 {"?<=", 14},
902 {"!<=", 19},
903 {"!?<", 20},
904 {"?>=", 22},
905 {"!?=", 24},
906 {"!=t", 27},
907 {"<=>", 29},
908 {"=t", 5},
909 {"?=", 6},
910 {"?<", 10},
911 {"<=", 13},
912 {"!>", 15},
913 {"?>", 18},
914 {">=", 21},
915 {"!<", 23},
916 {"<>", 25},
917 {"!=", 26},
918 {"!?", 28},
919 {"?", 2},
920 {"=", 4},
921 {"<", 9},
922 {">", 17}
923 };
924
925 static const struct selector_entry selector_table[] =
926 {
927 {"f", e_fsel},
928 {"l", e_lsel},
929 {"ld", e_ldsel},
930 {"lp", e_lpsel},
931 {"lr", e_lrsel},
932 {"ls", e_lssel},
933 {"lt", e_ltsel},
934 {"ltp", e_ltpsel},
935 {"n", e_nsel},
936 {"nl", e_nlsel},
937 {"nlr", e_nlrsel},
938 {"p", e_psel},
939 {"r", e_rsel},
940 {"rd", e_rdsel},
941 {"rp", e_rpsel},
942 {"rr", e_rrsel},
943 {"rs", e_rssel},
944 {"rt", e_rtsel},
945 {"rtp", e_rtpsel},
946 {"t", e_tsel},
947 };
948
949 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
950 /* default space and subspace dictionaries */
951
952 #define GDB_SYMBOLS GDB_SYMBOLS_SUBSPACE_NAME
953 #define GDB_STRINGS GDB_STRINGS_SUBSPACE_NAME
954
955 /* pre-defined subsegments (subspaces) for the HPPA. */
956 #define SUBSEG_CODE 0
957 #define SUBSEG_LIT 1
958 #define SUBSEG_MILLI 2
959 #define SUBSEG_DATA 0
960 #define SUBSEG_BSS 2
961 #define SUBSEG_UNWIND 3
962 #define SUBSEG_GDB_STRINGS 0
963 #define SUBSEG_GDB_SYMBOLS 1
964
965 static struct default_subspace_dict pa_def_subspaces[] =
966 {
967 {"$CODE$", 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 24, 0x2c, 0, 8, 0, 0, SUBSEG_CODE},
968 {"$DATA$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 24, 0x1f, 1, 8, 1, 1, SUBSEG_DATA},
969 {"$LIT$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 16, 0x2c, 0, 8, 0, 0, SUBSEG_LIT},
970 {"$MILLICODE$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 8, 0x2c, 0, 8, 0, 0, SUBSEG_MILLI},
971 {"$BSS$", 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 80, 0x1f, 1, 8, 1, 1, SUBSEG_BSS},
972 {NULL, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 255, 0x1f, 0, 4, 0, 0, 0}
973 };
974
975 static struct default_space_dict pa_def_spaces[] =
976 {
977 {"$TEXT$", 0, 1, 1, 0, 8, ASEC_NULL},
978 {"$PRIVATE$", 1, 1, 1, 1, 16, ASEC_NULL},
979 {NULL, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, ASEC_NULL}
980 };
981
982 /* Misc local definitions used by the assembler. */
983
984 /* These macros are used to maintain spaces/subspaces. */
985 #define SPACE_DEFINED(space_chain) (space_chain)->sd_defined
986 #define SPACE_USER_DEFINED(space_chain) (space_chain)->sd_user_defined
987 #define SPACE_SPNUM(space_chain) (space_chain)->sd_spnum
988 #define SPACE_NAME(space_chain) (space_chain)->sd_name
989
990 #define SUBSPACE_DEFINED(ss_chain) (ss_chain)->ssd_defined
991 #define SUBSPACE_NAME(ss_chain) (ss_chain)->ssd_name
992 #endif
993
994 /* Return nonzero if the string pointed to by S potentially represents
995 a right or left half of a FP register */
996 #define IS_R_SELECT(S) (*(S) == 'R' || *(S) == 'r')
997 #define IS_L_SELECT(S) (*(S) == 'L' || *(S) == 'l')
998
999 /* Store immediate values of shift/deposit/extract functions. */
1000
1001 #define SAVE_IMMEDIATE(VALUE) \
1002 { \
1003 if (immediate_check) \
1004 { \
1005 if (pos == -1) \
1006 pos = (VALUE); \
1007 else if (len == -1) \
1008 len = (VALUE); \
1009 } \
1010 }
1011
1012 /* Insert FIELD into OPCODE starting at bit START. Continue pa_ip
1013 main loop after insertion. */
1014
1015 #define INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE(OPCODE, FIELD, START) \
1016 { \
1017 ((OPCODE) |= (FIELD) << (START)); \
1018 continue; \
1019 }
1020
1021 /* Simple range checking for FIELD against HIGH and LOW bounds.
1022 IGNORE is used to suppress the error message. */
1023
1024 #define CHECK_FIELD(FIELD, HIGH, LOW, IGNORE) \
1025 { \
1026 if ((FIELD) > (HIGH) || (FIELD) < (LOW)) \
1027 { \
1028 if (! IGNORE) \
1029 as_bad (_("Field out of range [%d..%d] (%d)."), (LOW), (HIGH), \
1030 (int) (FIELD));\
1031 break; \
1032 } \
1033 }
1034
1035 /* Variant of CHECK_FIELD for use in md_apply_fix and other places where
1036 the current file and line number are not valid. */
1037
1038 #define CHECK_FIELD_WHERE(FIELD, HIGH, LOW, FILENAME, LINE) \
1039 { \
1040 if ((FIELD) > (HIGH) || (FIELD) < (LOW)) \
1041 { \
1042 as_bad_where ((FILENAME), (LINE), \
1043 _("Field out of range [%d..%d] (%d)."), (LOW), (HIGH), \
1044 (int) (FIELD));\
1045 break; \
1046 } \
1047 }
1048
1049 /* Simple alignment checking for FIELD against ALIGN (a power of two).
1050 IGNORE is used to suppress the error message. */
1051
1052 #define CHECK_ALIGN(FIELD, ALIGN, IGNORE) \
1053 { \
1054 if ((FIELD) & ((ALIGN) - 1)) \
1055 { \
1056 if (! IGNORE) \
1057 as_bad (_("Field not properly aligned [%d] (%d)."), (ALIGN), \
1058 (int) (FIELD));\
1059 break; \
1060 } \
1061 }
1062
1063 #define is_DP_relative(exp) \
1064 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1065 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$global$") == 0)
1066
1067 #define is_SB_relative(exp) \
1068 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1069 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$segrel$") == 0)
1070
1071 #define is_PC_relative(exp) \
1072 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1073 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$PIC_pcrel$0") == 0)
1074
1075 #define is_tls_gdidx(exp) \
1076 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1077 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$tls_gdidx$") == 0)
1078
1079 #define is_tls_ldidx(exp) \
1080 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1081 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$tls_ldidx$") == 0)
1082
1083 #define is_tls_dtpoff(exp) \
1084 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1085 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$tls_dtpoff$") == 0)
1086
1087 #define is_tls_ieoff(exp) \
1088 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1089 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$tls_ieoff$") == 0)
1090
1091 #define is_tls_leoff(exp) \
1092 ((exp).X_op == O_subtract \
1093 && strcmp (S_GET_NAME ((exp).X_op_symbol), "$tls_leoff$") == 0)
1094
1095 /* We need some complex handling for stabs (sym1 - sym2). Luckily, we'll
1096 always be able to reduce the expression to a constant, so we don't
1097 need real complex handling yet. */
1098 #define is_complex(exp) \
1099 ((exp).X_op != O_constant && (exp).X_op != O_symbol)
1100
1101 /* Actual functions to implement the PA specific code for the assembler. */
1102
1103 /* Called before writing the object file. Make sure entry/exit and
1104 proc/procend pairs match. */
1105
1106 void
1107 pa_check_eof (void)
1108 {
1109 if (within_entry_exit)
1110 as_fatal (_("Missing .exit\n"));
1111
1112 if (within_procedure)
1113 as_fatal (_("Missing .procend\n"));
1114 }
1115
1116 /* Returns a pointer to the label_symbol_struct for the current space.
1117 or NULL if no label_symbol_struct exists for the current space. */
1118
1119 static label_symbol_struct *
1120 pa_get_label (void)
1121 {
1122 label_symbol_struct *label_chain;
1123
1124 for (label_chain = label_symbols_rootp;
1125 label_chain;
1126 label_chain = label_chain->lss_next)
1127 {
1128 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1129 if (current_space == label_chain->lss_space && label_chain->lss_label)
1130 return label_chain;
1131 #endif
1132 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1133 if (now_seg == label_chain->lss_segment && label_chain->lss_label)
1134 return label_chain;
1135 #endif
1136 }
1137
1138 return NULL;
1139 }
1140
1141 /* Defines a label for the current space. If one is already defined,
1142 this function will replace it with the new label. */
1143
1144 void
1145 pa_define_label (symbolS *symbol)
1146 {
1147 label_symbol_struct *label_chain = pa_get_label ();
1148
1149 if (label_chain)
1150 label_chain->lss_label = symbol;
1151 else
1152 {
1153 /* Create a new label entry and add it to the head of the chain. */
1154 label_chain = xmalloc (sizeof (label_symbol_struct));
1155 label_chain->lss_label = symbol;
1156 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1157 label_chain->lss_space = current_space;
1158 #endif
1159 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1160 label_chain->lss_segment = now_seg;
1161 #endif
1162 label_chain->lss_next = NULL;
1163
1164 if (label_symbols_rootp)
1165 label_chain->lss_next = label_symbols_rootp;
1166
1167 label_symbols_rootp = label_chain;
1168 }
1169
1170 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1171 dwarf2_emit_label (symbol);
1172 #endif
1173 }
1174
1175 /* Removes a label definition for the current space.
1176 If there is no label_symbol_struct entry, then no action is taken. */
1177
1178 static void
1179 pa_undefine_label (void)
1180 {
1181 label_symbol_struct *label_chain;
1182 label_symbol_struct *prev_label_chain = NULL;
1183
1184 for (label_chain = label_symbols_rootp;
1185 label_chain;
1186 label_chain = label_chain->lss_next)
1187 {
1188 if (1
1189 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1190 && current_space == label_chain->lss_space && label_chain->lss_label
1191 #endif
1192 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1193 && now_seg == label_chain->lss_segment && label_chain->lss_label
1194 #endif
1195 )
1196 {
1197 /* Remove the label from the chain and free its memory. */
1198 if (prev_label_chain)
1199 prev_label_chain->lss_next = label_chain->lss_next;
1200 else
1201 label_symbols_rootp = label_chain->lss_next;
1202
1203 free (label_chain);
1204 break;
1205 }
1206 prev_label_chain = label_chain;
1207 }
1208 }
1209
1210 /* An HPPA-specific version of fix_new. This is required because the HPPA
1211 code needs to keep track of some extra stuff. Each call to fix_new_hppa
1212 results in the creation of an instance of an hppa_fix_struct. An
1213 hppa_fix_struct stores the extra information along with a pointer to the
1214 original fixS. This is attached to the original fixup via the
1215 tc_fix_data field. */
1216
1217 static void
1218 fix_new_hppa (fragS *frag,
1219 int where,
1220 int size,
1221 symbolS *add_symbol,
1222 offsetT offset,
1223 expressionS *exp,
1224 int pcrel,
1225 bfd_reloc_code_real_type r_type,
1226 enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field,
1227 int r_format,
1228 unsigned int arg_reloc,
1229 int unwind_bits ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1230 {
1231 fixS *new_fix;
1232 struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fix = obstack_alloc (&notes, sizeof (struct hppa_fix_struct));
1233
1234 if (exp != NULL)
1235 new_fix = fix_new_exp (frag, where, size, exp, pcrel, r_type);
1236 else
1237 new_fix = fix_new (frag, where, size, add_symbol, offset, pcrel, r_type);
1238 new_fix->tc_fix_data = (void *) hppa_fix;
1239 hppa_fix->fx_r_type = r_type;
1240 hppa_fix->fx_r_field = r_field;
1241 hppa_fix->fx_r_format = r_format;
1242 hppa_fix->fx_arg_reloc = arg_reloc;
1243 hppa_fix->segment = now_seg;
1244 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1245 if (r_type == R_ENTRY || r_type == R_EXIT)
1246 new_fix->fx_offset = unwind_bits;
1247 #endif
1248
1249 /* foo-$global$ is used to access non-automatic storage. $global$
1250 is really just a marker and has served its purpose, so eliminate
1251 it now so as not to confuse write.c. Ditto for $PIC_pcrel$0. */
1252 if (new_fix->fx_subsy
1253 && (strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$global$") == 0
1254 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$segrel$") == 0
1255 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$PIC_pcrel$0") == 0
1256 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$tls_gdidx$") == 0
1257 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$tls_ldidx$") == 0
1258 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$tls_dtpoff$") == 0
1259 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$tls_ieoff$") == 0
1260 || strcmp (S_GET_NAME (new_fix->fx_subsy), "$tls_leoff$") == 0))
1261 new_fix->fx_subsy = NULL;
1262 }
1263
1264 /* This fix_new is called by cons via TC_CONS_FIX_NEW.
1265 hppa_field_selector is set by the parse_cons_expression_hppa. */
1266
1267 void
1268 cons_fix_new_hppa (fragS *frag, int where, int size, expressionS *exp)
1269 {
1270 unsigned int rel_type;
1271
1272 /* Get a base relocation type. */
1273 if (is_DP_relative (*exp))
1274 rel_type = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
1275 else if (is_PC_relative (*exp))
1276 rel_type = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
1277 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1278 else if (is_SB_relative (*exp))
1279 rel_type = R_PARISC_SEGREL32;
1280 else if (is_tls_gdidx (*exp))
1281 rel_type = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
1282 else if (is_tls_ldidx (*exp))
1283 rel_type = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
1284 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (*exp))
1285 rel_type = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
1286 else if (is_tls_ieoff (*exp))
1287 rel_type = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
1288 else if (is_tls_leoff (*exp))
1289 rel_type = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
1290 #endif
1291 else if (is_complex (*exp))
1292 rel_type = R_HPPA_COMPLEX;
1293 else
1294 rel_type = R_HPPA;
1295
1296 if (hppa_field_selector != e_psel && hppa_field_selector != e_fsel)
1297 {
1298 as_warn (_("Invalid field selector. Assuming F%%."));
1299 hppa_field_selector = e_fsel;
1300 }
1301
1302 fix_new_hppa (frag, where, size,
1303 (symbolS *) NULL, (offsetT) 0, exp, 0, rel_type,
1304 hppa_field_selector, size * 8, 0, 0);
1305
1306 /* Reset field selector to its default state. */
1307 hppa_field_selector = 0;
1308 }
1309
1310 /* Mark (via expr_end) the end of an expression (I think). FIXME. */
1311
1312 static void
1313 get_expression (char *str)
1314 {
1315 char *save_in;
1316 asection *seg;
1317
1318 save_in = input_line_pointer;
1319 input_line_pointer = str;
1320 seg = expression (&the_insn.exp);
1321 if (!(seg == absolute_section
1322 || seg == undefined_section
1323 || SEG_NORMAL (seg)))
1324 {
1325 as_warn (_("Bad segment in expression."));
1326 expr_end = input_line_pointer;
1327 input_line_pointer = save_in;
1328 return;
1329 }
1330 expr_end = input_line_pointer;
1331 input_line_pointer = save_in;
1332 }
1333
1334 /* Parse a PA nullification completer (,n). Return nonzero if the
1335 completer was found; return zero if no completer was found. */
1336
1337 static int
1338 pa_parse_nullif (char **s)
1339 {
1340 int nullif;
1341
1342 nullif = 0;
1343 if (**s == ',')
1344 {
1345 *s = *s + 1;
1346 if (strncasecmp (*s, "n", 1) == 0)
1347 nullif = 1;
1348 else
1349 {
1350 as_bad (_("Invalid Nullification: (%c)"), **s);
1351 nullif = 0;
1352 }
1353 *s = *s + 1;
1354 }
1355
1356 return nullif;
1357 }
1358
1359 char *
1360 md_atof (int type, char *litP, int *sizeP)
1361 {
1362 return ieee_md_atof (type, litP, sizeP, TRUE);
1363 }
1364
1365 /* Write out big-endian. */
1366
1367 void
1368 md_number_to_chars (char *buf, valueT val, int n)
1369 {
1370 number_to_chars_bigendian (buf, val, n);
1371 }
1372
1373 /* Translate internal representation of relocation info to BFD target
1374 format. */
1375
1376 arelent **
1377 tc_gen_reloc (asection *section, fixS *fixp)
1378 {
1379 arelent *reloc;
1380 struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fixp;
1381 static arelent *no_relocs = NULL;
1382 arelent **relocs;
1383 reloc_type **codes;
1384 reloc_type code;
1385 int n_relocs;
1386 int i;
1387
1388 hppa_fixp = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixp->tc_fix_data;
1389 if (fixp->fx_addsy == 0)
1390 return &no_relocs;
1391
1392 gas_assert (hppa_fixp != 0);
1393 gas_assert (section != 0);
1394
1395 reloc = xmalloc (sizeof (arelent));
1396
1397 reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1398 *reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
1399
1400 /* Allow fixup_segment to recognize hand-written pc-relative relocations.
1401 When we went through cons_fix_new_hppa, we classified them as complex. */
1402 /* ??? It might be better to hide this +8 stuff in tc_cfi_emit_pcrel_expr,
1403 undefine DIFF_EXPR_OK, and let these sorts of complex expressions fail
1404 when R_HPPA_COMPLEX == R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED. */
1405 if (fixp->fx_r_type == (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) R_HPPA_COMPLEX
1406 && fixp->fx_pcrel)
1407 {
1408 fixp->fx_r_type = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
1409 fixp->fx_offset += 8;
1410 }
1411
1412 codes = hppa_gen_reloc_type (stdoutput,
1413 fixp->fx_r_type,
1414 hppa_fixp->fx_r_format,
1415 hppa_fixp->fx_r_field,
1416 fixp->fx_subsy != NULL,
1417 symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy));
1418
1419 if (codes == NULL)
1420 {
1421 as_bad_where (fixp->fx_file, fixp->fx_line, _("Cannot handle fixup"));
1422 abort ();
1423 }
1424
1425 for (n_relocs = 0; codes[n_relocs]; n_relocs++)
1426 ;
1427
1428 relocs = xmalloc (sizeof (arelent *) * n_relocs + 1);
1429 reloc = xmalloc (sizeof (arelent) * n_relocs);
1430 for (i = 0; i < n_relocs; i++)
1431 relocs[i] = &reloc[i];
1432
1433 relocs[n_relocs] = NULL;
1434
1435 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1436 switch (fixp->fx_r_type)
1437 {
1438 default:
1439 gas_assert (n_relocs == 1);
1440
1441 code = *codes[0];
1442
1443 /* Now, do any processing that is dependent on the relocation type. */
1444 switch (code)
1445 {
1446 case R_PARISC_DLTREL21L:
1447 case R_PARISC_DLTREL14R:
1448 case R_PARISC_DLTREL14F:
1449 case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
1450 case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
1451 case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
1452 /* For plabel relocations, the addend of the
1453 relocation should be either 0 (no static link) or 2
1454 (static link required). This adjustment is done in
1455 bfd/elf32-hppa.c:elf32_hppa_relocate_section.
1456
1457 We also slam a zero addend into the DLT relative relocs;
1458 it doesn't make a lot of sense to use any addend since
1459 it gets you a different (eg unknown) DLT entry. */
1460 reloc->addend = 0;
1461 break;
1462
1463 #ifdef ELF_ARG_RELOC
1464 case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
1465 case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
1466 case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
1467 case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
1468 case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
1469 case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
1470 case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
1471 reloc->addend = HPPA_R_ADDEND (hppa_fixp->fx_arg_reloc,
1472 fixp->fx_offset);
1473 break;
1474 #endif
1475
1476 case R_PARISC_DIR32:
1477 /* Facilitate hand-crafted unwind info. */
1478 if (strcmp (section->name, UNWIND_SECTION_NAME) == 0)
1479 code = R_PARISC_SEGREL32;
1480 /* Fall thru */
1481
1482 default:
1483 reloc->addend = fixp->fx_offset;
1484 break;
1485 }
1486
1487 reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1488 *reloc->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
1489 reloc->howto = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1490 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) code);
1491 reloc->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1492
1493 gas_assert (reloc->howto && (unsigned int) code == reloc->howto->type);
1494 break;
1495 }
1496 #else /* OBJ_SOM */
1497
1498 /* Walk over reach relocation returned by the BFD backend. */
1499 for (i = 0; i < n_relocs; i++)
1500 {
1501 code = *codes[i];
1502
1503 relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1504 *relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
1505 relocs[i]->howto =
1506 bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1507 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) code);
1508 relocs[i]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1509
1510 switch (code)
1511 {
1512 case R_COMP2:
1513 /* The only time we ever use a R_COMP2 fixup is for the difference
1514 of two symbols. With that in mind we fill in all four
1515 relocs now and break out of the loop. */
1516 gas_assert (i == 1);
1517 relocs[0]->sym_ptr_ptr
1518 = (asymbol **) bfd_abs_section_ptr->symbol_ptr_ptr;
1519 relocs[0]->howto
1520 = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1521 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[0]);
1522 relocs[0]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1523 relocs[0]->addend = 0;
1524 relocs[1]->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1525 *relocs[1]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_addsy);
1526 relocs[1]->howto
1527 = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1528 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[1]);
1529 relocs[1]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1530 relocs[1]->addend = 0;
1531 relocs[2]->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1532 *relocs[2]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (fixp->fx_subsy);
1533 relocs[2]->howto
1534 = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1535 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[2]);
1536 relocs[2]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1537 relocs[2]->addend = 0;
1538 relocs[3]->sym_ptr_ptr
1539 = (asymbol **) bfd_abs_section_ptr->symbol_ptr_ptr;
1540 relocs[3]->howto
1541 = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1542 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[3]);
1543 relocs[3]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1544 relocs[3]->addend = 0;
1545 relocs[4]->sym_ptr_ptr
1546 = (asymbol **) bfd_abs_section_ptr->symbol_ptr_ptr;
1547 relocs[4]->howto
1548 = bfd_reloc_type_lookup (stdoutput,
1549 (bfd_reloc_code_real_type) *codes[4]);
1550 relocs[4]->address = fixp->fx_frag->fr_address + fixp->fx_where;
1551 relocs[4]->addend = 0;
1552 goto done;
1553 case R_PCREL_CALL:
1554 case R_ABS_CALL:
1555 relocs[i]->addend = HPPA_R_ADDEND (hppa_fixp->fx_arg_reloc, 0);
1556 break;
1557
1558 case R_DLT_REL:
1559 case R_DATA_PLABEL:
1560 case R_CODE_PLABEL:
1561 /* For plabel relocations, the addend of the
1562 relocation should be either 0 (no static link) or 2
1563 (static link required).
1564
1565 FIXME: We always assume no static link!
1566
1567 We also slam a zero addend into the DLT relative relocs;
1568 it doesn't make a lot of sense to use any addend since
1569 it gets you a different (eg unknown) DLT entry. */
1570 relocs[i]->addend = 0;
1571 break;
1572
1573 case R_N_MODE:
1574 case R_S_MODE:
1575 case R_D_MODE:
1576 case R_R_MODE:
1577 case R_FSEL:
1578 case R_LSEL:
1579 case R_RSEL:
1580 case R_BEGIN_BRTAB:
1581 case R_END_BRTAB:
1582 case R_BEGIN_TRY:
1583 case R_N0SEL:
1584 case R_N1SEL:
1585 /* There is no symbol or addend associated with these fixups. */
1586 relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1587 *relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (dummy_symbol);
1588 relocs[i]->addend = 0;
1589 break;
1590
1591 case R_END_TRY:
1592 case R_ENTRY:
1593 case R_EXIT:
1594 /* There is no symbol associated with these fixups. */
1595 relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = xmalloc (sizeof (asymbol *));
1596 *relocs[i]->sym_ptr_ptr = symbol_get_bfdsym (dummy_symbol);
1597 relocs[i]->addend = fixp->fx_offset;
1598 break;
1599
1600 default:
1601 relocs[i]->addend = fixp->fx_offset;
1602 }
1603 }
1604
1605 done:
1606 #endif
1607
1608 return relocs;
1609 }
1610
1611 /* Process any machine dependent frag types. */
1612
1613 void
1614 md_convert_frag (bfd *abfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
1615 asection *sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
1616 fragS *fragP)
1617 {
1618 unsigned int address;
1619
1620 if (fragP->fr_type == rs_machine_dependent)
1621 {
1622 switch ((int) fragP->fr_subtype)
1623 {
1624 case 0:
1625 fragP->fr_type = rs_fill;
1626 know (fragP->fr_var == 1);
1627 know (fragP->fr_next);
1628 address = fragP->fr_address + fragP->fr_fix;
1629 if (address % fragP->fr_offset)
1630 {
1631 fragP->fr_offset =
1632 fragP->fr_next->fr_address
1633 - fragP->fr_address
1634 - fragP->fr_fix;
1635 }
1636 else
1637 fragP->fr_offset = 0;
1638 break;
1639 }
1640 }
1641 }
1642
1643 /* Round up a section size to the appropriate boundary. */
1644
1645 valueT
1646 md_section_align (asection *segment, valueT size)
1647 {
1648 int align = bfd_get_section_alignment (stdoutput, segment);
1649 int align2 = (1 << align) - 1;
1650
1651 return (size + align2) & ~align2;
1652 }
1653
1654 /* Return the approximate size of a frag before relaxation has occurred. */
1655
1656 int
1657 md_estimate_size_before_relax (fragS *fragP, asection *segment ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1658 {
1659 int size;
1660
1661 size = 0;
1662
1663 while ((fragP->fr_fix + size) % fragP->fr_offset)
1664 size++;
1665
1666 return size;
1667 }
1668 \f
1669 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1670 # ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
1671 const char *md_shortopts = "Vc";
1672 # else
1673 const char *md_shortopts = "V";
1674 # endif
1675 #else
1676 # ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
1677 const char *md_shortopts = "c";
1678 # else
1679 const char *md_shortopts = "";
1680 # endif
1681 #endif
1682
1683 struct option md_longopts[] =
1684 {
1685 #ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
1686 {"warn-comment", no_argument, NULL, 'c'},
1687 #endif
1688 {NULL, no_argument, NULL, 0}
1689 };
1690 size_t md_longopts_size = sizeof (md_longopts);
1691
1692 int
1693 md_parse_option (int c, char *arg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1694 {
1695 switch (c)
1696 {
1697 default:
1698 return 0;
1699
1700 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1701 case 'V':
1702 print_version_id ();
1703 break;
1704 #endif
1705 #ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
1706 case 'c':
1707 warn_comment = 1;
1708 break;
1709 #endif
1710 }
1711
1712 return 1;
1713 }
1714
1715 void
1716 md_show_usage (FILE *stream ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1717 {
1718 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1719 fprintf (stream, _("\
1720 -Q ignored\n"));
1721 #endif
1722 #ifdef WARN_COMMENTS
1723 fprintf (stream, _("\
1724 -c print a warning if a comment is found\n"));
1725 #endif
1726 }
1727 \f
1728 /* We have no need to default values of symbols. */
1729
1730 symbolS *
1731 md_undefined_symbol (char *name ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1732 {
1733 return NULL;
1734 }
1735
1736 #if defined (OBJ_SOM) || defined (ELF_ARG_RELOC)
1737 #define nonzero_dibits(x) \
1738 ((x) | (((x) & 0x55555555) << 1) | (((x) & 0xAAAAAAAA) >> 1))
1739 #define arg_reloc_stub_needed(CALLER, CALLEE) \
1740 (((CALLER) ^ (CALLEE)) & nonzero_dibits (CALLER) & nonzero_dibits (CALLEE))
1741 #else
1742 #define arg_reloc_stub_needed(CALLER, CALLEE) 0
1743 #endif
1744
1745 /* Apply a fixup to an instruction. */
1746
1747 void
1748 md_apply_fix (fixS *fixP, valueT *valP, segT seg ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
1749 {
1750 char *fixpos;
1751 struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fixP;
1752 offsetT new_val;
1753 int insn, val, fmt;
1754
1755 /* SOM uses R_HPPA_ENTRY and R_HPPA_EXIT relocations which can
1756 never be "applied" (they are just markers). Likewise for
1757 R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB and R_HPPA_END_BRTAB. */
1758 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1759 if (fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_ENTRY
1760 || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_EXIT
1761 || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB
1762 || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_END_BRTAB
1763 || fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_BEGIN_TRY)
1764 return;
1765
1766 /* Disgusting. We must set fx_offset ourselves -- R_HPPA_END_TRY
1767 fixups are considered not adjustable, which in turn causes
1768 adjust_reloc_syms to not set fx_offset. Ugh. */
1769 if (fixP->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_END_TRY)
1770 {
1771 fixP->fx_offset = * valP;
1772 return;
1773 }
1774 #endif
1775 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1776 if (fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
1777 || fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
1778 return;
1779 #endif
1780
1781 if (fixP->fx_addsy == NULL && fixP->fx_pcrel == 0)
1782 fixP->fx_done = 1;
1783
1784 /* There should be a HPPA specific fixup associated with the GAS fixup. */
1785 hppa_fixP = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixP->tc_fix_data;
1786 if (hppa_fixP == NULL)
1787 {
1788 as_bad_where (fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line,
1789 _("no hppa_fixup entry for fixup type 0x%x"),
1790 fixP->fx_r_type);
1791 return;
1792 }
1793
1794 fixpos = fixP->fx_frag->fr_literal + fixP->fx_where;
1795
1796 if (fixP->fx_size != 4 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_format == 32)
1797 {
1798 /* Handle constant output. */
1799 number_to_chars_bigendian (fixpos, *valP, fixP->fx_size);
1800 return;
1801 }
1802
1803 insn = bfd_get_32 (stdoutput, fixpos);
1804 fmt = bfd_hppa_insn2fmt (stdoutput, insn);
1805
1806 /* If there is a symbol associated with this fixup, then it's something
1807 which will need a SOM relocation (except for some PC-relative relocs).
1808 In such cases we should treat the "val" or "addend" as zero since it
1809 will be added in as needed from fx_offset in tc_gen_reloc. */
1810 if ((fixP->fx_addsy != NULL
1811 || fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_NONE)
1812 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1813 && fmt != 32
1814 #endif
1815 )
1816 new_val = ((fmt == 12 || fmt == 17 || fmt == 22) ? 8 : 0);
1817 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1818 /* These field selectors imply that we do not want an addend. */
1819 else if (hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_psel
1820 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_rpsel
1821 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_lpsel
1822 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_tsel
1823 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_rtsel
1824 || hppa_fixP->fx_r_field == e_ltsel)
1825 new_val = ((fmt == 12 || fmt == 17 || fmt == 22) ? 8 : 0);
1826 #endif
1827 else
1828 new_val = hppa_field_adjust (* valP, 0, hppa_fixP->fx_r_field);
1829
1830 /* Handle pc-relative exceptions from above. */
1831 if ((fmt == 12 || fmt == 17 || fmt == 22)
1832 && fixP->fx_addsy
1833 && fixP->fx_pcrel
1834 && !arg_reloc_stub_needed (symbol_arg_reloc_info (fixP->fx_addsy),
1835 hppa_fixP->fx_arg_reloc)
1836 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1837 && (* valP - 8 + 8192 < 16384
1838 || (fmt == 17 && * valP - 8 + 262144 < 524288)
1839 || (fmt == 22 && * valP - 8 + 8388608 < 16777216))
1840 #endif
1841 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
1842 && (* valP - 8 + 262144 < 524288
1843 || (fmt == 22 && * valP - 8 + 8388608 < 16777216))
1844 #endif
1845 && !S_IS_EXTERNAL (fixP->fx_addsy)
1846 && !S_IS_WEAK (fixP->fx_addsy)
1847 && S_GET_SEGMENT (fixP->fx_addsy) == hppa_fixP->segment
1848 && !(fixP->fx_subsy
1849 && S_GET_SEGMENT (fixP->fx_subsy) != hppa_fixP->segment))
1850 {
1851 new_val = hppa_field_adjust (* valP, 0, hppa_fixP->fx_r_field);
1852 }
1853
1854 switch (fmt)
1855 {
1856 case 10:
1857 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 8191, -8192,
1858 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1859 val = new_val;
1860
1861 insn = (insn & ~ 0x3ff1) | (((val & 0x1ff8) << 1)
1862 | ((val & 0x2000) >> 13));
1863 break;
1864 case -11:
1865 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 8191, -8192,
1866 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1867 val = new_val;
1868
1869 insn = (insn & ~ 0x3ff9) | (((val & 0x1ffc) << 1)
1870 | ((val & 0x2000) >> 13));
1871 break;
1872 /* Handle all opcodes with the 'j' operand type. */
1873 case 14:
1874 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 8191, -8192,
1875 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1876 val = new_val;
1877
1878 insn = ((insn & ~ 0x3fff) | low_sign_unext (val, 14));
1879 break;
1880
1881 /* Handle all opcodes with the 'k' operand type. */
1882 case 21:
1883 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 1048575, -1048576,
1884 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1885 val = new_val;
1886
1887 insn = (insn & ~ 0x1fffff) | re_assemble_21 (val);
1888 break;
1889
1890 /* Handle all the opcodes with the 'i' operand type. */
1891 case 11:
1892 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val, 1023, -1024,
1893 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1894 val = new_val;
1895
1896 insn = (insn & ~ 0x7ff) | low_sign_unext (val, 11);
1897 break;
1898
1899 /* Handle all the opcodes with the 'w' operand type. */
1900 case 12:
1901 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val - 8, 8191, -8192,
1902 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1903 val = new_val - 8;
1904
1905 insn = (insn & ~ 0x1ffd) | re_assemble_12 (val >> 2);
1906 break;
1907
1908 /* Handle some of the opcodes with the 'W' operand type. */
1909 case 17:
1910 {
1911 offsetT distance = * valP;
1912
1913 /* If this is an absolute branch (ie no link) with an out of
1914 range target, then we want to complain. */
1915 if (fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL
1916 && (insn & 0xffe00000) == 0xe8000000)
1917 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (distance - 8, 262143, -262144,
1918 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1919
1920 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val - 8, 262143, -262144,
1921 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1922 val = new_val - 8;
1923
1924 insn = (insn & ~ 0x1f1ffd) | re_assemble_17 (val >> 2);
1925 break;
1926 }
1927
1928 case 22:
1929 {
1930 offsetT distance = * valP;
1931
1932 /* If this is an absolute branch (ie no link) with an out of
1933 range target, then we want to complain. */
1934 if (fixP->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL
1935 && (insn & 0xffe00000) == 0xe8000000)
1936 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (distance - 8, 8388607, -8388608,
1937 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1938
1939 CHECK_FIELD_WHERE (new_val - 8, 8388607, -8388608,
1940 fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line);
1941 val = new_val - 8;
1942
1943 insn = (insn & ~ 0x3ff1ffd) | re_assemble_22 (val >> 2);
1944 break;
1945 }
1946
1947 case -10:
1948 val = new_val;
1949 insn = (insn & ~ 0xfff1) | re_assemble_16 (val & -8);
1950 break;
1951
1952 case -16:
1953 val = new_val;
1954 insn = (insn & ~ 0xfff9) | re_assemble_16 (val & -4);
1955 break;
1956
1957 case 16:
1958 val = new_val;
1959 insn = (insn & ~ 0xffff) | re_assemble_16 (val);
1960 break;
1961
1962 case 32:
1963 insn = new_val;
1964 break;
1965
1966 default:
1967 as_bad_where (fixP->fx_file, fixP->fx_line,
1968 _("Unknown relocation encountered in md_apply_fix."));
1969 return;
1970 }
1971
1972 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
1973 switch (fixP->fx_r_type)
1974 {
1975 case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
1976 case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
1977 case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
1978 case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
1979 case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
1980 case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
1981 case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
1982 case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
1983 if (fixP->fx_addsy)
1984 S_SET_THREAD_LOCAL (fixP->fx_addsy);
1985 break;
1986 default:
1987 break;
1988 }
1989 #endif
1990
1991 /* Insert the relocation. */
1992 bfd_put_32 (stdoutput, insn, fixpos);
1993 }
1994
1995 /* Exactly what point is a PC-relative offset relative TO?
1996 On the PA, they're relative to the address of the offset. */
1997
1998 long
1999 md_pcrel_from (fixS *fixP)
2000 {
2001 return fixP->fx_where + fixP->fx_frag->fr_address;
2002 }
2003
2004 /* Return nonzero if the input line pointer is at the end of
2005 a statement. */
2006
2007 static int
2008 is_end_of_statement (void)
2009 {
2010 return ((*input_line_pointer == '\n')
2011 || (*input_line_pointer == ';')
2012 || (*input_line_pointer == '!'));
2013 }
2014
2015 #define REG_NAME_CNT (sizeof (pre_defined_registers) / sizeof (struct pd_reg))
2016
2017 /* Given NAME, find the register number associated with that name, return
2018 the integer value associated with the given name or -1 on failure. */
2019
2020 static int
2021 reg_name_search (char *name)
2022 {
2023 int middle, low, high;
2024 int cmp;
2025
2026 low = 0;
2027 high = REG_NAME_CNT - 1;
2028
2029 do
2030 {
2031 middle = (low + high) / 2;
2032 cmp = strcasecmp (name, pre_defined_registers[middle].name);
2033 if (cmp < 0)
2034 high = middle - 1;
2035 else if (cmp > 0)
2036 low = middle + 1;
2037 else
2038 return pre_defined_registers[middle].value;
2039 }
2040 while (low <= high);
2041
2042 return -1;
2043 }
2044
2045 /* Read a number from S. The number might come in one of many forms,
2046 the most common will be a hex or decimal constant, but it could be
2047 a pre-defined register (Yuk!), or an absolute symbol.
2048
2049 Return 1 on success or 0 on failure. If STRICT, then a missing
2050 register prefix will cause a failure. The number itself is
2051 returned in `pa_number'.
2052
2053 IS_FLOAT indicates that a PA-89 FP register number should be
2054 parsed; A `l' or `r' suffix is checked for if but 2 of IS_FLOAT is
2055 not set.
2056
2057 pa_parse_number can not handle negative constants and will fail
2058 horribly if it is passed such a constant. */
2059
2060 static int
2061 pa_parse_number (char **s, int is_float)
2062 {
2063 int num;
2064 char *name;
2065 char c;
2066 symbolS *sym;
2067 int status;
2068 char *p = *s;
2069 bfd_boolean have_prefix;
2070
2071 /* Skip whitespace before the number. */
2072 while (*p == ' ' || *p == '\t')
2073 p = p + 1;
2074
2075 pa_number = -1;
2076 have_prefix = 0;
2077 num = 0;
2078 if (!strict && ISDIGIT (*p))
2079 {
2080 /* Looks like a number. */
2081
2082 if (*p == '0' && (*(p + 1) == 'x' || *(p + 1) == 'X'))
2083 {
2084 /* The number is specified in hex. */
2085 p += 2;
2086 while (ISDIGIT (*p) || ((*p >= 'a') && (*p <= 'f'))
2087 || ((*p >= 'A') && (*p <= 'F')))
2088 {
2089 if (ISDIGIT (*p))
2090 num = num * 16 + *p - '0';
2091 else if (*p >= 'a' && *p <= 'f')
2092 num = num * 16 + *p - 'a' + 10;
2093 else
2094 num = num * 16 + *p - 'A' + 10;
2095 ++p;
2096 }
2097 }
2098 else
2099 {
2100 /* The number is specified in decimal. */
2101 while (ISDIGIT (*p))
2102 {
2103 num = num * 10 + *p - '0';
2104 ++p;
2105 }
2106 }
2107
2108 pa_number = num;
2109
2110 /* Check for a `l' or `r' suffix. */
2111 if (is_float)
2112 {
2113 pa_number += FP_REG_BASE;
2114 if (! (is_float & 2))
2115 {
2116 if (IS_R_SELECT (p))
2117 {
2118 pa_number += FP_REG_RSEL;
2119 ++p;
2120 }
2121 else if (IS_L_SELECT (p))
2122 {
2123 ++p;
2124 }
2125 }
2126 }
2127 }
2128 else if (*p == '%')
2129 {
2130 /* The number might be a predefined register. */
2131 have_prefix = 1;
2132 name = p;
2133 p++;
2134 c = *p;
2135 /* Tege hack: Special case for general registers as the general
2136 code makes a binary search with case translation, and is VERY
2137 slow. */
2138 if (c == 'r')
2139 {
2140 p++;
2141 if (*p == 'e' && *(p + 1) == 't'
2142 && (*(p + 2) == '0' || *(p + 2) == '1'))
2143 {
2144 p += 2;
2145 num = *p - '0' + 28;
2146 p++;
2147 }
2148 else if (*p == 'p')
2149 {
2150 num = 2;
2151 p++;
2152 }
2153 else if (!ISDIGIT (*p))
2154 {
2155 if (print_errors)
2156 as_bad (_("Undefined register: '%s'."), name);
2157 num = -1;
2158 }
2159 else
2160 {
2161 do
2162 num = num * 10 + *p++ - '0';
2163 while (ISDIGIT (*p));
2164 }
2165 }
2166 else
2167 {
2168 /* Do a normal register search. */
2169 while (is_part_of_name (c))
2170 {
2171 p = p + 1;
2172 c = *p;
2173 }
2174 *p = 0;
2175 status = reg_name_search (name);
2176 if (status >= 0)
2177 num = status;
2178 else
2179 {
2180 if (print_errors)
2181 as_bad (_("Undefined register: '%s'."), name);
2182 num = -1;
2183 }
2184 *p = c;
2185 }
2186
2187 pa_number = num;
2188 }
2189 else
2190 {
2191 /* And finally, it could be a symbol in the absolute section which
2192 is effectively a constant, or a register alias symbol. */
2193 name = p;
2194 c = *p;
2195 while (is_part_of_name (c))
2196 {
2197 p = p + 1;
2198 c = *p;
2199 }
2200 *p = 0;
2201 if ((sym = symbol_find (name)) != NULL)
2202 {
2203 if (S_GET_SEGMENT (sym) == reg_section)
2204 {
2205 num = S_GET_VALUE (sym);
2206 /* Well, we don't really have one, but we do have a
2207 register, so... */
2208 have_prefix = TRUE;
2209 }
2210 else if (S_GET_SEGMENT (sym) == bfd_abs_section_ptr)
2211 num = S_GET_VALUE (sym);
2212 else if (!strict)
2213 {
2214 if (print_errors)
2215 as_bad (_("Non-absolute symbol: '%s'."), name);
2216 num = -1;
2217 }
2218 }
2219 else if (!strict)
2220 {
2221 /* There is where we'd come for an undefined symbol
2222 or for an empty string. For an empty string we
2223 will return zero. That's a concession made for
2224 compatibility with the braindamaged HP assemblers. */
2225 if (*name == 0)
2226 num = 0;
2227 else
2228 {
2229 if (print_errors)
2230 as_bad (_("Undefined absolute constant: '%s'."), name);
2231 num = -1;
2232 }
2233 }
2234 *p = c;
2235
2236 pa_number = num;
2237 }
2238
2239 if (!strict || have_prefix)
2240 {
2241 *s = p;
2242 return 1;
2243 }
2244 return 0;
2245 }
2246
2247 /* Return nonzero if the given INSN and L/R information will require
2248 a new PA-1.1 opcode. */
2249
2250 static int
2251 need_pa11_opcode (void)
2252 {
2253 if ((pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL) != 0
2254 && !(the_insn.fpof1 == DBL && the_insn.fpof2 == DBL))
2255 {
2256 /* If this instruction is specific to a particular architecture,
2257 then set a new architecture. */
2258 if (bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) < pa11)
2259 {
2260 if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, pa11))
2261 as_warn (_("could not update architecture and machine"));
2262 }
2263 return TRUE;
2264 }
2265 else
2266 return FALSE;
2267 }
2268
2269 /* Parse a condition for a fcmp instruction. Return the numerical
2270 code associated with the condition. */
2271
2272 static int
2273 pa_parse_fp_cmp_cond (char **s)
2274 {
2275 int cond, i;
2276
2277 cond = 0;
2278
2279 for (i = 0; i < 32; i++)
2280 {
2281 if (strncasecmp (*s, fp_cond_map[i].string,
2282 strlen (fp_cond_map[i].string)) == 0)
2283 {
2284 cond = fp_cond_map[i].cond;
2285 *s += strlen (fp_cond_map[i].string);
2286 /* If not a complete match, back up the input string and
2287 report an error. */
2288 if (**s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2289 {
2290 *s -= strlen (fp_cond_map[i].string);
2291 break;
2292 }
2293 while (**s == ' ' || **s == '\t')
2294 *s = *s + 1;
2295 return cond;
2296 }
2297 }
2298
2299 as_bad (_("Invalid FP Compare Condition: %s"), *s);
2300
2301 /* Advance over the bogus completer. */
2302 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2303 *s += 1;
2304
2305 return 0;
2306 }
2307
2308 /* Parse a graphics test complete for ftest. */
2309
2310 static int
2311 pa_parse_ftest_gfx_completer (char **s)
2312 {
2313 int value;
2314
2315 value = 0;
2316 if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc8", 4) == 0)
2317 {
2318 value = 5;
2319 *s += 4;
2320 }
2321 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc6", 4) == 0)
2322 {
2323 value = 9;
2324 *s += 4;
2325 }
2326 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc4", 4) == 0)
2327 {
2328 value = 13;
2329 *s += 4;
2330 }
2331 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc2", 4) == 0)
2332 {
2333 value = 17;
2334 *s += 4;
2335 }
2336 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "acc", 3) == 0)
2337 {
2338 value = 1;
2339 *s += 3;
2340 }
2341 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "rej8", 4) == 0)
2342 {
2343 value = 6;
2344 *s += 4;
2345 }
2346 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "rej", 3) == 0)
2347 {
2348 value = 2;
2349 *s += 3;
2350 }
2351 else
2352 {
2353 value = 0;
2354 as_bad (_("Invalid FTEST completer: %s"), *s);
2355 }
2356
2357 return value;
2358 }
2359
2360 /* Parse an FP operand format completer returning the completer
2361 type. */
2362
2363 static fp_operand_format
2364 pa_parse_fp_cnv_format (char **s)
2365 {
2366 int format;
2367
2368 format = SGL;
2369 if (**s == ',')
2370 {
2371 *s += 1;
2372 if (strncasecmp (*s, "sgl", 3) == 0)
2373 {
2374 format = SGL;
2375 *s += 4;
2376 }
2377 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "dbl", 3) == 0)
2378 {
2379 format = DBL;
2380 *s += 4;
2381 }
2382 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "quad", 4) == 0)
2383 {
2384 format = QUAD;
2385 *s += 5;
2386 }
2387 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "w", 1) == 0)
2388 {
2389 format = W;
2390 *s += 2;
2391 }
2392 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "uw", 2) == 0)
2393 {
2394 format = UW;
2395 *s += 3;
2396 }
2397 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "dw", 2) == 0)
2398 {
2399 format = DW;
2400 *s += 3;
2401 }
2402 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "udw", 3) == 0)
2403 {
2404 format = UDW;
2405 *s += 4;
2406 }
2407 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "qw", 2) == 0)
2408 {
2409 format = QW;
2410 *s += 3;
2411 }
2412 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "uqw", 3) == 0)
2413 {
2414 format = UQW;
2415 *s += 4;
2416 }
2417 else
2418 {
2419 format = ILLEGAL_FMT;
2420 as_bad (_("Invalid FP Operand Format: %3s"), *s);
2421 }
2422 }
2423
2424 return format;
2425 }
2426
2427 /* Parse an FP operand format completer returning the completer
2428 type. */
2429
2430 static fp_operand_format
2431 pa_parse_fp_format (char **s)
2432 {
2433 int format;
2434
2435 format = SGL;
2436 if (**s == ',')
2437 {
2438 *s += 1;
2439 if (strncasecmp (*s, "sgl", 3) == 0)
2440 {
2441 format = SGL;
2442 *s += 4;
2443 }
2444 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "dbl", 3) == 0)
2445 {
2446 format = DBL;
2447 *s += 4;
2448 }
2449 else if (strncasecmp (*s, "quad", 4) == 0)
2450 {
2451 format = QUAD;
2452 *s += 5;
2453 }
2454 else
2455 {
2456 format = ILLEGAL_FMT;
2457 as_bad (_("Invalid FP Operand Format: %3s"), *s);
2458 }
2459 }
2460
2461 return format;
2462 }
2463
2464 /* Convert from a selector string into a selector type. */
2465
2466 static int
2467 pa_chk_field_selector (char **str)
2468 {
2469 int middle, low, high;
2470 int cmp;
2471 char name[4];
2472
2473 /* Read past any whitespace. */
2474 /* FIXME: should we read past newlines and formfeeds??? */
2475 while (**str == ' ' || **str == '\t' || **str == '\n' || **str == '\f')
2476 *str = *str + 1;
2477
2478 if ((*str)[1] == '\'' || (*str)[1] == '%')
2479 name[0] = TOLOWER ((*str)[0]),
2480 name[1] = 0;
2481 else if ((*str)[2] == '\'' || (*str)[2] == '%')
2482 name[0] = TOLOWER ((*str)[0]),
2483 name[1] = TOLOWER ((*str)[1]),
2484 name[2] = 0;
2485 else if ((*str)[3] == '\'' || (*str)[3] == '%')
2486 name[0] = TOLOWER ((*str)[0]),
2487 name[1] = TOLOWER ((*str)[1]),
2488 name[2] = TOLOWER ((*str)[2]),
2489 name[3] = 0;
2490 else
2491 return e_fsel;
2492
2493 low = 0;
2494 high = sizeof (selector_table) / sizeof (struct selector_entry) - 1;
2495
2496 do
2497 {
2498 middle = (low + high) / 2;
2499 cmp = strcmp (name, selector_table[middle].prefix);
2500 if (cmp < 0)
2501 high = middle - 1;
2502 else if (cmp > 0)
2503 low = middle + 1;
2504 else
2505 {
2506 *str += strlen (name) + 1;
2507 #ifndef OBJ_SOM
2508 if (selector_table[middle].field_selector == e_nsel)
2509 return e_fsel;
2510 #endif
2511 return selector_table[middle].field_selector;
2512 }
2513 }
2514 while (low <= high);
2515
2516 return e_fsel;
2517 }
2518
2519 /* Parse a .byte, .word, .long expression for the HPPA. Called by
2520 cons via the TC_PARSE_CONS_EXPRESSION macro. */
2521
2522 void
2523 parse_cons_expression_hppa (expressionS *exp)
2524 {
2525 hppa_field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&input_line_pointer);
2526 expression (exp);
2527 }
2528
2529 /* Evaluate an absolute expression EXP which may be modified by
2530 the selector FIELD_SELECTOR. Return the value of the expression. */
2531 static int
2532 evaluate_absolute (struct pa_it *insn)
2533 {
2534 offsetT value;
2535 expressionS exp;
2536 int field_selector = insn->field_selector;
2537
2538 exp = insn->exp;
2539 value = exp.X_add_number;
2540
2541 return hppa_field_adjust (0, value, field_selector);
2542 }
2543
2544 /* Mark (via expr_end) the end of an absolute expression. FIXME. */
2545
2546 static int
2547 pa_get_absolute_expression (struct pa_it *insn, char **strp)
2548 {
2549 char *save_in;
2550
2551 insn->field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (strp);
2552 save_in = input_line_pointer;
2553 input_line_pointer = *strp;
2554 expression (&insn->exp);
2555 /* This is not perfect, but is a huge improvement over doing nothing.
2556
2557 The PA assembly syntax is ambiguous in a variety of ways. Consider
2558 this string "4 %r5" Is that the number 4 followed by the register
2559 r5, or is that 4 MOD r5?
2560
2561 If we get a modulo expression when looking for an absolute, we try
2562 again cutting off the input string at the first whitespace character. */
2563 if (insn->exp.X_op == O_modulus)
2564 {
2565 char *s, c;
2566
2567 input_line_pointer = *strp;
2568 s = *strp;
2569 while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
2570 s++;
2571
2572 c = *s;
2573 *s = 0;
2574
2575 pa_get_absolute_expression (insn, strp);
2576
2577 input_line_pointer = save_in;
2578 *s = c;
2579 return evaluate_absolute (insn);
2580 }
2581 /* When in strict mode we have a non-match, fix up the pointers
2582 and return to our caller. */
2583 if (insn->exp.X_op != O_constant && strict)
2584 {
2585 expr_end = input_line_pointer;
2586 input_line_pointer = save_in;
2587 return 0;
2588 }
2589 if (insn->exp.X_op != O_constant)
2590 {
2591 as_bad (_("Bad segment (should be absolute)."));
2592 expr_end = input_line_pointer;
2593 input_line_pointer = save_in;
2594 return 0;
2595 }
2596 expr_end = input_line_pointer;
2597 input_line_pointer = save_in;
2598 return evaluate_absolute (insn);
2599 }
2600
2601 /* Given an argument location specification return the associated
2602 argument location number. */
2603
2604 static unsigned int
2605 pa_build_arg_reloc (char *type_name)
2606 {
2607
2608 if (strncasecmp (type_name, "no", 2) == 0)
2609 return 0;
2610 if (strncasecmp (type_name, "gr", 2) == 0)
2611 return 1;
2612 else if (strncasecmp (type_name, "fr", 2) == 0)
2613 return 2;
2614 else if (strncasecmp (type_name, "fu", 2) == 0)
2615 return 3;
2616 else
2617 as_bad (_("Invalid argument location: %s\n"), type_name);
2618
2619 return 0;
2620 }
2621
2622 /* Encode and return an argument relocation specification for
2623 the given register in the location specified by arg_reloc. */
2624
2625 static unsigned int
2626 pa_align_arg_reloc (unsigned int reg, unsigned int arg_reloc)
2627 {
2628 unsigned int new_reloc;
2629
2630 new_reloc = arg_reloc;
2631 switch (reg)
2632 {
2633 case 0:
2634 new_reloc <<= 8;
2635 break;
2636 case 1:
2637 new_reloc <<= 6;
2638 break;
2639 case 2:
2640 new_reloc <<= 4;
2641 break;
2642 case 3:
2643 new_reloc <<= 2;
2644 break;
2645 default:
2646 as_bad (_("Invalid argument description: %d"), reg);
2647 }
2648
2649 return new_reloc;
2650 }
2651
2652 /* Parse a non-negated compare/subtract completer returning the
2653 number (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer. */
2654
2655 static int
2656 pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr (char **s)
2657 {
2658 int cmpltr;
2659 char *name = *s + 1;
2660 char c;
2661 char *save_s = *s;
2662 int nullify = 0;
2663
2664 cmpltr = 0;
2665 if (**s == ',')
2666 {
2667 *s += 1;
2668 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2669 *s += 1;
2670 c = **s;
2671 **s = 0x00;
2672
2673 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
2674 {
2675 cmpltr = 1;
2676 }
2677 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
2678 {
2679 cmpltr = 2;
2680 }
2681 else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
2682 {
2683 cmpltr = 3;
2684 }
2685 else if (strcmp (name, "<<") == 0)
2686 {
2687 cmpltr = 4;
2688 }
2689 else if (strcmp (name, "<<=") == 0)
2690 {
2691 cmpltr = 5;
2692 }
2693 else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
2694 {
2695 cmpltr = 6;
2696 }
2697 else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
2698 {
2699 cmpltr = 7;
2700 }
2701 /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
2702 completer. */
2703 else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
2704 {
2705 cmpltr = 0;
2706 nullify = 1;
2707 }
2708 else
2709 {
2710 cmpltr = -1;
2711 }
2712 **s = c;
2713 }
2714
2715 /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction. */
2716 if (nullify)
2717 *s = save_s;
2718
2719 return cmpltr;
2720 }
2721
2722 /* Parse a negated compare/subtract completer returning the
2723 number (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer. */
2724
2725 static int
2726 pa_parse_neg_cmpsub_cmpltr (char **s)
2727 {
2728 int cmpltr;
2729 char *name = *s + 1;
2730 char c;
2731 char *save_s = *s;
2732 int nullify = 0;
2733
2734 cmpltr = 0;
2735 if (**s == ',')
2736 {
2737 *s += 1;
2738 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2739 *s += 1;
2740 c = **s;
2741 **s = 0x00;
2742
2743 if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
2744 {
2745 cmpltr = 0;
2746 }
2747 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
2748 {
2749 cmpltr = 1;
2750 }
2751 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
2752 {
2753 cmpltr = 2;
2754 }
2755 else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
2756 {
2757 cmpltr = 3;
2758 }
2759 else if (strcmp (name, ">>=") == 0)
2760 {
2761 cmpltr = 4;
2762 }
2763 else if (strcmp (name, ">>") == 0)
2764 {
2765 cmpltr = 5;
2766 }
2767 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
2768 {
2769 cmpltr = 6;
2770 }
2771 else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
2772 {
2773 cmpltr = 7;
2774 }
2775 /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
2776 completer. */
2777 else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
2778 {
2779 cmpltr = 0;
2780 nullify = 1;
2781 }
2782 else
2783 {
2784 cmpltr = -1;
2785 }
2786 **s = c;
2787 }
2788
2789 /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction. */
2790 if (nullify)
2791 *s = save_s;
2792
2793 return cmpltr;
2794 }
2795
2796 /* Parse a 64 bit compare and branch completer returning the number (for
2797 encoding in instructions) of the given completer.
2798
2799 Nonnegated comparisons are returned as 0-7, negated comparisons are
2800 returned as 8-15. */
2801
2802 static int
2803 pa_parse_cmpb_64_cmpltr (char **s)
2804 {
2805 int cmpltr;
2806 char *name = *s + 1;
2807 char c;
2808
2809 cmpltr = -1;
2810 if (**s == ',')
2811 {
2812 *s += 1;
2813 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2814 *s += 1;
2815 c = **s;
2816 **s = 0x00;
2817
2818 if (strcmp (name, "*") == 0)
2819 {
2820 cmpltr = 0;
2821 }
2822 else if (strcmp (name, "*=") == 0)
2823 {
2824 cmpltr = 1;
2825 }
2826 else if (strcmp (name, "*<") == 0)
2827 {
2828 cmpltr = 2;
2829 }
2830 else if (strcmp (name, "*<=") == 0)
2831 {
2832 cmpltr = 3;
2833 }
2834 else if (strcmp (name, "*<<") == 0)
2835 {
2836 cmpltr = 4;
2837 }
2838 else if (strcmp (name, "*<<=") == 0)
2839 {
2840 cmpltr = 5;
2841 }
2842 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*sv") == 0)
2843 {
2844 cmpltr = 6;
2845 }
2846 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*od") == 0)
2847 {
2848 cmpltr = 7;
2849 }
2850 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*tr") == 0)
2851 {
2852 cmpltr = 8;
2853 }
2854 else if (strcmp (name, "*<>") == 0)
2855 {
2856 cmpltr = 9;
2857 }
2858 else if (strcmp (name, "*>=") == 0)
2859 {
2860 cmpltr = 10;
2861 }
2862 else if (strcmp (name, "*>") == 0)
2863 {
2864 cmpltr = 11;
2865 }
2866 else if (strcmp (name, "*>>=") == 0)
2867 {
2868 cmpltr = 12;
2869 }
2870 else if (strcmp (name, "*>>") == 0)
2871 {
2872 cmpltr = 13;
2873 }
2874 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*nsv") == 0)
2875 {
2876 cmpltr = 14;
2877 }
2878 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*ev") == 0)
2879 {
2880 cmpltr = 15;
2881 }
2882 else
2883 {
2884 cmpltr = -1;
2885 }
2886 **s = c;
2887 }
2888
2889 return cmpltr;
2890 }
2891
2892 /* Parse a 64 bit compare immediate and branch completer returning the number
2893 (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer. */
2894
2895 static int
2896 pa_parse_cmpib_64_cmpltr (char **s)
2897 {
2898 int cmpltr;
2899 char *name = *s + 1;
2900 char c;
2901
2902 cmpltr = -1;
2903 if (**s == ',')
2904 {
2905 *s += 1;
2906 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2907 *s += 1;
2908 c = **s;
2909 **s = 0x00;
2910
2911 if (strcmp (name, "*<<") == 0)
2912 {
2913 cmpltr = 0;
2914 }
2915 else if (strcmp (name, "*=") == 0)
2916 {
2917 cmpltr = 1;
2918 }
2919 else if (strcmp (name, "*<") == 0)
2920 {
2921 cmpltr = 2;
2922 }
2923 else if (strcmp (name, "*<=") == 0)
2924 {
2925 cmpltr = 3;
2926 }
2927 else if (strcmp (name, "*>>=") == 0)
2928 {
2929 cmpltr = 4;
2930 }
2931 else if (strcmp (name, "*<>") == 0)
2932 {
2933 cmpltr = 5;
2934 }
2935 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>=") == 0)
2936 {
2937 cmpltr = 6;
2938 }
2939 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>") == 0)
2940 {
2941 cmpltr = 7;
2942 }
2943 else
2944 {
2945 cmpltr = -1;
2946 }
2947 **s = c;
2948 }
2949
2950 return cmpltr;
2951 }
2952
2953 /* Parse a non-negated addition completer returning the number
2954 (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer. */
2955
2956 static int
2957 pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr (char **s)
2958 {
2959 int cmpltr;
2960 char *name = *s + 1;
2961 char c;
2962 char *save_s = *s;
2963 int nullify = 0;
2964
2965 cmpltr = 0;
2966 if (**s == ',')
2967 {
2968 *s += 1;
2969 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
2970 *s += 1;
2971 c = **s;
2972 **s = 0x00;
2973 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
2974 {
2975 cmpltr = 1;
2976 }
2977 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
2978 {
2979 cmpltr = 2;
2980 }
2981 else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
2982 {
2983 cmpltr = 3;
2984 }
2985 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nuv") == 0)
2986 {
2987 cmpltr = 4;
2988 }
2989 else if (strcasecmp (name, "znv") == 0)
2990 {
2991 cmpltr = 5;
2992 }
2993 else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
2994 {
2995 cmpltr = 6;
2996 }
2997 else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
2998 {
2999 cmpltr = 7;
3000 }
3001 /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
3002 completer. */
3003 else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
3004 {
3005 cmpltr = 0;
3006 nullify = 1;
3007 }
3008 else
3009 {
3010 cmpltr = -1;
3011 }
3012 **s = c;
3013 }
3014
3015 /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction. */
3016 if (nullify)
3017 *s = save_s;
3018
3019 return cmpltr;
3020 }
3021
3022 /* Parse a negated addition completer returning the number
3023 (for encoding in instructions) of the given completer. */
3024
3025 static int
3026 pa_parse_neg_add_cmpltr (char **s)
3027 {
3028 int cmpltr;
3029 char *name = *s + 1;
3030 char c;
3031 char *save_s = *s;
3032 int nullify = 0;
3033
3034 cmpltr = 0;
3035 if (**s == ',')
3036 {
3037 *s += 1;
3038 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
3039 *s += 1;
3040 c = **s;
3041 **s = 0x00;
3042 if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
3043 {
3044 cmpltr = 0;
3045 }
3046 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
3047 {
3048 cmpltr = 1;
3049 }
3050 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
3051 {
3052 cmpltr = 2;
3053 }
3054 else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
3055 {
3056 cmpltr = 3;
3057 }
3058 else if (strcasecmp (name, "uv") == 0)
3059 {
3060 cmpltr = 4;
3061 }
3062 else if (strcasecmp (name, "vnz") == 0)
3063 {
3064 cmpltr = 5;
3065 }
3066 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
3067 {
3068 cmpltr = 6;
3069 }
3070 else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
3071 {
3072 cmpltr = 7;
3073 }
3074 /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
3075 completer. */
3076 else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
3077 {
3078 cmpltr = 0;
3079 nullify = 1;
3080 }
3081 else
3082 {
3083 cmpltr = -1;
3084 }
3085 **s = c;
3086 }
3087
3088 /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction. */
3089 if (nullify)
3090 *s = save_s;
3091
3092 return cmpltr;
3093 }
3094
3095 /* Parse a 64 bit wide mode add and branch completer returning the number (for
3096 encoding in instructions) of the given completer. */
3097
3098 static int
3099 pa_parse_addb_64_cmpltr (char **s)
3100 {
3101 int cmpltr;
3102 char *name = *s + 1;
3103 char c;
3104 char *save_s = *s;
3105 int nullify = 0;
3106
3107 cmpltr = 0;
3108 if (**s == ',')
3109 {
3110 *s += 1;
3111 while (**s != ',' && **s != ' ' && **s != '\t')
3112 *s += 1;
3113 c = **s;
3114 **s = 0x00;
3115 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
3116 {
3117 cmpltr = 1;
3118 }
3119 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
3120 {
3121 cmpltr = 2;
3122 }
3123 else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
3124 {
3125 cmpltr = 3;
3126 }
3127 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nuv") == 0)
3128 {
3129 cmpltr = 4;
3130 }
3131 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*=") == 0)
3132 {
3133 cmpltr = 5;
3134 }
3135 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*<") == 0)
3136 {
3137 cmpltr = 6;
3138 }
3139 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*<=") == 0)
3140 {
3141 cmpltr = 7;
3142 }
3143 else if (strcmp (name, "tr") == 0)
3144 {
3145 cmpltr = 8;
3146 }
3147 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
3148 {
3149 cmpltr = 9;
3150 }
3151 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
3152 {
3153 cmpltr = 10;
3154 }
3155 else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
3156 {
3157 cmpltr = 11;
3158 }
3159 else if (strcasecmp (name, "uv") == 0)
3160 {
3161 cmpltr = 12;
3162 }
3163 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*<>") == 0)
3164 {
3165 cmpltr = 13;
3166 }
3167 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>=") == 0)
3168 {
3169 cmpltr = 14;
3170 }
3171 else if (strcasecmp (name, "*>") == 0)
3172 {
3173 cmpltr = 15;
3174 }
3175 /* If we have something like addb,n then there is no condition
3176 completer. */
3177 else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0)
3178 {
3179 cmpltr = 0;
3180 nullify = 1;
3181 }
3182 else
3183 {
3184 cmpltr = -1;
3185 }
3186 **s = c;
3187 }
3188
3189 /* Reset pointers if this was really a ,n for a branch instruction. */
3190 if (nullify)
3191 *s = save_s;
3192
3193 return cmpltr;
3194 }
3195
3196 /* Do the real work for assembling a single instruction. Store results
3197 into the global "the_insn" variable. */
3198
3199 static void
3200 pa_ip (char *str)
3201 {
3202 char *error_message = "";
3203 char *s, c, *argstart, *name, *save_s;
3204 const char *args;
3205 int match = FALSE;
3206 int comma = 0;
3207 int cmpltr, nullif, flag, cond, need_cond, num;
3208 int immediate_check = 0, pos = -1, len = -1;
3209 unsigned long opcode;
3210 struct pa_opcode *insn;
3211
3212 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
3213 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
3214 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
3215 #endif
3216
3217 /* Convert everything up to the first whitespace character into lower
3218 case. */
3219 for (s = str; *s != ' ' && *s != '\t' && *s != '\n' && *s != '\0'; s++)
3220 *s = TOLOWER (*s);
3221
3222 /* Skip to something interesting. */
3223 for (s = str;
3224 ISUPPER (*s) || ISLOWER (*s) || (*s >= '0' && *s <= '3');
3225 ++s)
3226 ;
3227
3228 switch (*s)
3229 {
3230
3231 case '\0':
3232 break;
3233
3234 case ',':
3235 comma = 1;
3236
3237 /*FALLTHROUGH */
3238
3239 case ' ':
3240 *s++ = '\0';
3241 break;
3242
3243 default:
3244 as_bad (_("Unknown opcode: `%s'"), str);
3245 return;
3246 }
3247
3248 /* Look up the opcode in the hash table. */
3249 if ((insn = (struct pa_opcode *) hash_find (op_hash, str)) == NULL)
3250 {
3251 as_bad (_("Unknown opcode: `%s'"), str);
3252 return;
3253 }
3254
3255 if (comma)
3256 *--s = ',';
3257
3258 /* Mark the location where arguments for the instruction start, then
3259 start processing them. */
3260 argstart = s;
3261 for (;;)
3262 {
3263 /* Do some initialization. */
3264 opcode = insn->match;
3265 strict = (insn->flags & FLAG_STRICT);
3266 memset (&the_insn, 0, sizeof (the_insn));
3267 need_cond = 1;
3268
3269 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_NONE;
3270
3271 if (insn->arch >= pa20
3272 && bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) < insn->arch)
3273 goto failed;
3274
3275 /* Build the opcode, checking as we go to make
3276 sure that the operands match. */
3277 for (args = insn->args;; ++args)
3278 {
3279 /* Absorb white space in instruction. */
3280 while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')
3281 s++;
3282
3283 switch (*args)
3284 {
3285 /* End of arguments. */
3286 case '\0':
3287 if (*s == '\0')
3288 match = TRUE;
3289 break;
3290
3291 case '+':
3292 if (*s == '+')
3293 {
3294 ++s;
3295 continue;
3296 }
3297 if (*s == '-')
3298 continue;
3299 break;
3300
3301 /* These must match exactly. */
3302 case '(':
3303 case ')':
3304 case ',':
3305 case ' ':
3306 if (*s++ == *args)
3307 continue;
3308 break;
3309
3310 /* Handle a 5 bit register or control register field at 10. */
3311 case 'b':
3312 case '^':
3313 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
3314 break;
3315 num = pa_number;
3316 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3317 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
3318
3319 /* Handle %sar or %cr11. No bits get set, we just verify that it
3320 is there. */
3321 case '!':
3322 /* Skip whitespace before register. */
3323 while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')
3324 s = s + 1;
3325
3326 if (!strncasecmp (s, "%sar", 4))
3327 {
3328 s += 4;
3329 continue;
3330 }
3331 else if (!strncasecmp (s, "%cr11", 5))
3332 {
3333 s += 5;
3334 continue;
3335 }
3336 break;
3337
3338 /* Handle a 5 bit register field at 15. */
3339 case 'x':
3340 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
3341 break;
3342 num = pa_number;
3343 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3344 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
3345
3346 /* Handle a 5 bit register field at 31. */
3347 case 't':
3348 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
3349 break;
3350 num = pa_number;
3351 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3352 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3353
3354 /* Handle a 5 bit register field at 10 and 15. */
3355 case 'a':
3356 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
3357 break;
3358 num = pa_number;
3359 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
3360 opcode |= num << 16;
3361 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
3362
3363 /* Handle a 5 bit field length at 31. */
3364 case 'T':
3365 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3366 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3367 break;
3368 s = expr_end;
3369 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32, 1, 0);
3370 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
3371 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, 32 - num, 0);
3372
3373 /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 15. */
3374 case '5':
3375 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3376 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3377 break;
3378 s = expr_end;
3379 /* When in strict mode, we want to just reject this
3380 match instead of giving an out of range error. */
3381 CHECK_FIELD (num, 15, -16, strict);
3382 num = low_sign_unext (num, 5);
3383 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
3384
3385 /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 31. */
3386 case 'V':
3387 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3388 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3389 break;
3390 s = expr_end;
3391 /* When in strict mode, we want to just reject this
3392 match instead of giving an out of range error. */
3393 CHECK_FIELD (num, 15, -16, strict);
3394 num = low_sign_unext (num, 5);
3395 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3396
3397 /* Handle an unsigned 5 bit immediate at 31. */
3398 case 'r':
3399 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3400 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3401 break;
3402 s = expr_end;
3403 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
3404 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
3405
3406 /* Handle an unsigned 5 bit immediate at 15. */
3407 case 'R':
3408 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3409 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3410 break;
3411 s = expr_end;
3412 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
3413 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
3414
3415 /* Handle an unsigned 10 bit immediate at 15. */
3416 case 'U':
3417 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
3418 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
3419 break;
3420 s = expr_end;
3421 CHECK_FIELD (num, 1023, 0, strict);
3422 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
3423
3424 /* Handle a 2 bit space identifier at 17. */
3425 case 's':
3426 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
3427 break;
3428 num = pa_number;
3429 CHECK_FIELD (num, 3, 0, 1);
3430 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 14);
3431
3432 /* Handle a 3 bit space identifier at 18. */
3433 case 'S':
3434 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 0))
3435 break;
3436 num = pa_number;
3437 CHECK_FIELD (num, 7, 0, 1);
3438 opcode |= re_assemble_3 (num);
3439 continue;
3440
3441 /* Handle all completers. */
3442 case 'c':
3443 switch (*++args)
3444 {
3445
3446 /* Handle a completer for an indexing load or store. */
3447 case 'X':
3448 case 'x':
3449 {
3450 int uu = 0;
3451 int m = 0;
3452 int i = 0;
3453 while (*s == ',' && i < 2)
3454 {
3455 s++;
3456 if (strncasecmp (s, "sm", 2) == 0)
3457 {
3458 uu = 1;
3459 m = 1;
3460 s++;
3461 i++;
3462 }
3463 else if (strncasecmp (s, "m", 1) == 0)
3464 m = 1;
3465 else if ((strncasecmp (s, "s ", 2) == 0)
3466 || (strncasecmp (s, "s,", 2) == 0))
3467 uu = 1;
3468 else if (strict)
3469 {
3470 /* This is a match failure. */
3471 s--;
3472 break;
3473 }
3474 else
3475 as_bad (_("Invalid Indexed Load Completer."));
3476 s++;
3477 i++;
3478 }
3479 if (i > 2)
3480 as_bad (_("Invalid Indexed Load Completer Syntax."));
3481 opcode |= m << 5;
3482 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, uu, 13);
3483 }
3484
3485 /* Handle a short load/store completer. */
3486 case 'M':
3487 case 'm':
3488 case 'q':
3489 case 'J':
3490 case 'e':
3491 {
3492 int a = 0;
3493 int m = 0;
3494 if (*s == ',')
3495 {
3496 s++;
3497 if (strncasecmp (s, "ma", 2) == 0)
3498 {
3499 a = 0;
3500 m = 1;
3501 s += 2;
3502 }
3503 else if (strncasecmp (s, "mb", 2) == 0)
3504 {
3505 a = 1;
3506 m = 1;
3507 s += 2;
3508 }
3509 else if (strict)
3510 /* This is a match failure. */
3511 s--;
3512 else
3513 {
3514 as_bad (_("Invalid Short Load/Store Completer."));
3515 s += 2;
3516 }
3517 }
3518 /* If we did not get a ma/mb completer, then we do not
3519 consider this a positive match for 'ce'. */
3520 else if (*args == 'e')
3521 break;
3522
3523 /* 'J', 'm', 'M' and 'q' are the same, except for where they
3524 encode the before/after field. */
3525 if (*args == 'm' || *args == 'M')
3526 {
3527 opcode |= m << 5;
3528 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 13);
3529 }
3530 else if (*args == 'q')
3531 {
3532 opcode |= m << 3;
3533 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 2);
3534 }
3535 else if (*args == 'J')
3536 {
3537 /* M bit is explicit in the major opcode. */
3538 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 2);
3539 }
3540 else if (*args == 'e')
3541 {
3542 /* Stash the ma/mb flag temporarily in the
3543 instruction. We will use (and remove it)
3544 later when handling 'J', 'K', '<' & '>'. */
3545 opcode |= a;
3546 continue;
3547 }
3548 }
3549
3550 /* Handle a stbys completer. */
3551 case 'A':
3552 case 's':
3553 {
3554 int a = 0;
3555 int m = 0;
3556 int i = 0;
3557 while (*s == ',' && i < 2)
3558 {
3559 s++;
3560 if (strncasecmp (s, "m", 1) == 0)
3561 m = 1;
3562 else if ((strncasecmp (s, "b ", 2) == 0)
3563 || (strncasecmp (s, "b,", 2) == 0))
3564 a = 0;
3565 else if (strncasecmp (s, "e", 1) == 0)
3566 a = 1;
3567 /* In strict mode, this is a match failure. */
3568 else if (strict)
3569 {
3570 s--;
3571 break;
3572 }
3573 else
3574 as_bad (_("Invalid Store Bytes Short Completer"));
3575 s++;
3576 i++;
3577 }
3578 if (i > 2)
3579 as_bad (_("Invalid Store Bytes Short Completer"));
3580 opcode |= m << 5;
3581 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, a, 13);
3582 }
3583
3584 /* Handle load cache hint completer. */
3585 case 'c':
3586 cmpltr = 0;
3587 if (!strncmp (s, ",sl", 3))
3588 {
3589 s += 3;
3590 cmpltr = 2;
3591 }
3592 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 10);
3593
3594 /* Handle store cache hint completer. */
3595 case 'C':
3596 cmpltr = 0;
3597 if (!strncmp (s, ",sl", 3))
3598 {
3599 s += 3;
3600 cmpltr = 2;
3601 }
3602 else if (!strncmp (s, ",bc", 3))
3603 {
3604 s += 3;
3605 cmpltr = 1;
3606 }
3607 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 10);
3608
3609 /* Handle load and clear cache hint completer. */
3610 case 'd':
3611 cmpltr = 0;
3612 if (!strncmp (s, ",co", 3))
3613 {
3614 s += 3;
3615 cmpltr = 1;
3616 }
3617 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 10);
3618
3619 /* Handle load ordering completer. */
3620 case 'o':
3621 if (strncmp (s, ",o", 2) != 0)
3622 break;
3623 s += 2;
3624 continue;
3625
3626 /* Handle a branch gate completer. */
3627 case 'g':
3628 if (strncasecmp (s, ",gate", 5) != 0)
3629 break;
3630 s += 5;
3631 continue;
3632
3633 /* Handle a branch link and push completer. */
3634 case 'p':
3635 if (strncasecmp (s, ",l,push", 7) != 0)
3636 break;
3637 s += 7;
3638 continue;
3639
3640 /* Handle a branch link completer. */
3641 case 'l':
3642 if (strncasecmp (s, ",l", 2) != 0)
3643 break;
3644 s += 2;
3645 continue;
3646
3647 /* Handle a branch pop completer. */
3648 case 'P':
3649 if (strncasecmp (s, ",pop", 4) != 0)
3650 break;
3651 s += 4;
3652 continue;
3653
3654 /* Handle a local processor completer. */
3655 case 'L':
3656 if (strncasecmp (s, ",l", 2) != 0)
3657 break;
3658 s += 2;
3659 continue;
3660
3661 /* Handle a PROBE read/write completer. */
3662 case 'w':
3663 flag = 0;
3664 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",w", 2))
3665 {
3666 flag = 1;
3667 s += 2;
3668 }
3669 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",r", 2))
3670 {
3671 flag = 0;
3672 s += 2;
3673 }
3674
3675 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 6);
3676
3677 /* Handle MFCTL wide completer. */
3678 case 'W':
3679 if (strncasecmp (s, ",w", 2) != 0)
3680 break;
3681 s += 2;
3682 continue;
3683
3684 /* Handle an RFI restore completer. */
3685 case 'r':
3686 flag = 0;
3687 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",r", 2))
3688 {
3689 flag = 5;
3690 s += 2;
3691 }
3692
3693 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 5);
3694
3695 /* Handle a system control completer. */
3696 case 'Z':
3697 if (*s == ',' && (*(s + 1) == 'm' || *(s + 1) == 'M'))
3698 {
3699 flag = 1;
3700 s += 2;
3701 }
3702 else
3703 flag = 0;
3704
3705 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 5);
3706
3707 /* Handle intermediate/final completer for DCOR. */
3708 case 'i':
3709 flag = 0;
3710 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",i", 2))
3711 {
3712 flag = 1;
3713 s += 2;
3714 }
3715
3716 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 6);
3717
3718 /* Handle zero/sign extension completer. */
3719 case 'z':
3720 flag = 1;
3721 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",z", 2))
3722 {
3723 flag = 0;
3724 s += 2;
3725 }
3726
3727 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 10);
3728
3729 /* Handle add completer. */
3730 case 'a':
3731 flag = 1;
3732 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",l", 2))
3733 {
3734 flag = 2;
3735 s += 2;
3736 }
3737 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tsv", 4))
3738 {
3739 flag = 3;
3740 s += 4;
3741 }
3742
3743 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 10);
3744
3745 /* Handle 64 bit carry for ADD. */
3746 case 'Y':
3747 flag = 0;
3748 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",dc,tsv", 7) ||
3749 !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,dc", 7))
3750 {
3751 flag = 1;
3752 s += 7;
3753 }
3754 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",dc", 3))
3755 {
3756 flag = 0;
3757 s += 3;
3758 }
3759 else
3760 break;
3761
3762 /* Condition is not required with "dc". */
3763 need_cond = 0;
3764 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3765
3766 /* Handle 32 bit carry for ADD. */
3767 case 'y':
3768 flag = 0;
3769 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",c,tsv", 6) ||
3770 !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,c", 6))
3771 {
3772 flag = 1;
3773 s += 6;
3774 }
3775 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",c", 2))
3776 {
3777 flag = 0;
3778 s += 2;
3779 }
3780 else
3781 break;
3782
3783 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3784
3785 /* Handle trap on signed overflow. */
3786 case 'v':
3787 flag = 0;
3788 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tsv", 4))
3789 {
3790 flag = 1;
3791 s += 4;
3792 }
3793
3794 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3795
3796 /* Handle trap on condition and overflow. */
3797 case 't':
3798 flag = 0;
3799 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tc,tsv", 7) ||
3800 !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,tc", 7))
3801 {
3802 flag = 1;
3803 s += 7;
3804 }
3805 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tc", 3))
3806 {
3807 flag = 0;
3808 s += 3;
3809 }
3810 else
3811 break;
3812
3813 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3814
3815 /* Handle 64 bit borrow for SUB. */
3816 case 'B':
3817 flag = 0;
3818 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",db,tsv", 7) ||
3819 !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,db", 7))
3820 {
3821 flag = 1;
3822 s += 7;
3823 }
3824 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",db", 3))
3825 {
3826 flag = 0;
3827 s += 3;
3828 }
3829 else
3830 break;
3831
3832 /* Condition is not required with "db". */
3833 need_cond = 0;
3834 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3835
3836 /* Handle 32 bit borrow for SUB. */
3837 case 'b':
3838 flag = 0;
3839 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",b,tsv", 6) ||
3840 !strncasecmp (s, ",tsv,b", 6))
3841 {
3842 flag = 1;
3843 s += 6;
3844 }
3845 else if (!strncasecmp (s, ",b", 2))
3846 {
3847 flag = 0;
3848 s += 2;
3849 }
3850 else
3851 break;
3852
3853 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
3854
3855 /* Handle trap condition completer for UADDCM. */
3856 case 'T':
3857 flag = 0;
3858 if (!strncasecmp (s, ",tc", 3))
3859 {
3860 flag = 1;
3861 s += 3;
3862 }
3863
3864 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 6);
3865
3866 /* Handle signed/unsigned at 21. */
3867 case 'S':
3868 {
3869 int sign = 1;
3870 if (strncasecmp (s, ",s", 2) == 0)
3871 {
3872 sign = 1;
3873 s += 2;
3874 }
3875 else if (strncasecmp (s, ",u", 2) == 0)
3876 {
3877 sign = 0;
3878 s += 2;
3879 }
3880
3881 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, sign, 10);
3882 }
3883
3884 /* Handle left/right combination at 17:18. */
3885 case 'h':
3886 if (*s++ == ',')
3887 {
3888 int lr = 0;
3889 if (*s == 'r')
3890 lr = 2;
3891 else if (*s == 'l')
3892 lr = 0;
3893 else
3894 as_bad (_("Invalid left/right combination completer"));
3895
3896 s++;
3897 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, lr, 13);
3898 }
3899 else
3900 as_bad (_("Invalid left/right combination completer"));
3901 break;
3902
3903 /* Handle saturation at 24:25. */
3904 case 'H':
3905 {
3906 int sat = 3;
3907 if (strncasecmp (s, ",ss", 3) == 0)
3908 {
3909 sat = 1;
3910 s += 3;
3911 }
3912 else if (strncasecmp (s, ",us", 3) == 0)
3913 {
3914 sat = 0;
3915 s += 3;
3916 }
3917
3918 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, sat, 6);
3919 }
3920
3921 /* Handle permutation completer. */
3922 case '*':
3923 if (*s++ == ',')
3924 {
3925 int permloc[4];
3926 int perm = 0;
3927 int i = 0;
3928 permloc[0] = 13;
3929 permloc[1] = 10;
3930 permloc[2] = 8;
3931 permloc[3] = 6;
3932 for (; i < 4; i++)
3933 {
3934 switch (*s++)
3935 {
3936 case '0':
3937 perm = 0;
3938 break;
3939 case '1':
3940 perm = 1;
3941 break;
3942 case '2':
3943 perm = 2;
3944 break;
3945 case '3':
3946 perm = 3;
3947 break;
3948 default:
3949 as_bad (_("Invalid permutation completer"));
3950 }
3951 opcode |= perm << permloc[i];
3952 }
3953 continue;
3954 }
3955 else
3956 as_bad (_("Invalid permutation completer"));
3957 break;
3958
3959 default:
3960 abort ();
3961 }
3962 break;
3963
3964 /* Handle all conditions. */
3965 case '?':
3966 {
3967 args++;
3968 switch (*args)
3969 {
3970 /* Handle FP compare conditions. */
3971 case 'f':
3972 cond = pa_parse_fp_cmp_cond (&s);
3973 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cond, 0);
3974
3975 /* Handle an add condition. */
3976 case 'A':
3977 case 'a':
3978 cmpltr = 0;
3979 flag = 0;
3980 if (*s == ',')
3981 {
3982 s++;
3983
3984 /* 64 bit conditions. */
3985 if (*args == 'A')
3986 {
3987 if (*s == '*')
3988 s++;
3989 else
3990 break;
3991 }
3992 else if (*s == '*')
3993 break;
3994
3995 name = s;
3996 while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
3997 s += 1;
3998 c = *s;
3999 *s = 0x00;
4000 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
4001 cmpltr = 1;
4002 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
4003 cmpltr = 2;
4004 else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
4005 cmpltr = 3;
4006 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nuv") == 0)
4007 cmpltr = 4;
4008 else if (strcasecmp (name, "znv") == 0)
4009 cmpltr = 5;
4010 else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
4011 cmpltr = 6;
4012 else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
4013 cmpltr = 7;
4014 else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
4015 {
4016 cmpltr = 0;
4017 flag = 1;
4018 }
4019 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
4020 {
4021 cmpltr = 1;
4022 flag = 1;
4023 }
4024 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
4025 {
4026 cmpltr = 2;
4027 flag = 1;
4028 }
4029 else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
4030 {
4031 cmpltr = 3;
4032 flag = 1;
4033 }
4034 else if (strcasecmp (name, "uv") == 0)
4035 {
4036 cmpltr = 4;
4037 flag = 1;
4038 }
4039 else if (strcasecmp (name, "vnz") == 0)
4040 {
4041 cmpltr = 5;
4042 flag = 1;
4043 }
4044 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
4045 {
4046 cmpltr = 6;
4047 flag = 1;
4048 }
4049 else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
4050 {
4051 cmpltr = 7;
4052 flag = 1;
4053 }
4054 /* ",*" is a valid condition. */
4055 else if (*args == 'a' || *name)
4056 as_bad (_("Invalid Add Condition: %s"), name);
4057 *s = c;
4058 }
4059 /* Except with "dc", we have a match failure with
4060 'A' if we don't have a doubleword condition. */
4061 else if (*args == 'A' && need_cond)
4062 break;
4063
4064 opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
4065 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
4066
4067 /* Handle non-negated add and branch condition. */
4068 case 'd':
4069 cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr (&s);
4070 if (cmpltr < 0)
4071 {
4072 as_bad (_("Invalid Add and Branch Condition"));
4073 cmpltr = 0;
4074 }
4075 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
4076
4077 /* Handle 64 bit wide-mode add and branch condition. */
4078 case 'W':
4079 cmpltr = pa_parse_addb_64_cmpltr (&s);
4080 if (cmpltr < 0)
4081 {
4082 as_bad (_("Invalid Add and Branch Condition"));
4083 cmpltr = 0;
4084 }
4085 else
4086 {
4087 /* Negated condition requires an opcode change. */
4088 opcode |= (cmpltr & 8) << 24;
4089 }
4090 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr & 7, 13);
4091
4092 /* Handle a negated or non-negated add and branch
4093 condition. */
4094 case '@':
4095 save_s = s;
4096 cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_add_cmpltr (&s);
4097 if (cmpltr < 0)
4098 {
4099 s = save_s;
4100 cmpltr = pa_parse_neg_add_cmpltr (&s);
4101 if (cmpltr < 0)
4102 {
4103 as_bad (_("Invalid Compare/Subtract Condition"));
4104 cmpltr = 0;
4105 }
4106 else
4107 {
4108 /* Negated condition requires an opcode change. */
4109 opcode |= 1 << 27;
4110 }
4111 }
4112 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
4113
4114 /* Handle branch on bit conditions. */
4115 case 'B':
4116 case 'b':
4117 cmpltr = 0;
4118 if (*s == ',')
4119 {
4120 s++;
4121
4122 if (*args == 'B')
4123 {
4124 if (*s == '*')
4125 s++;
4126 else
4127 break;
4128 }
4129 else if (*s == '*')
4130 break;
4131
4132 if (strncmp (s, "<", 1) == 0)
4133 {
4134 cmpltr = 0;
4135 s++;
4136 }
4137 else if (strncmp (s, ">=", 2) == 0)
4138 {
4139 cmpltr = 1;
4140 s += 2;
4141 }
4142 else
4143 as_bad (_("Invalid Branch On Bit Condition: %c"), *s);
4144 }
4145 else
4146 as_bad (_("Missing Branch On Bit Condition"));
4147
4148 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 15);
4149
4150 /* Handle a compare/subtract condition. */
4151 case 'S':
4152 case 's':
4153 cmpltr = 0;
4154 flag = 0;
4155 if (*s == ',')
4156 {
4157 s++;
4158
4159 /* 64 bit conditions. */
4160 if (*args == 'S')
4161 {
4162 if (*s == '*')
4163 s++;
4164 else
4165 break;
4166 }
4167 else if (*s == '*')
4168 break;
4169
4170 name = s;
4171 while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
4172 s += 1;
4173 c = *s;
4174 *s = 0x00;
4175 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
4176 cmpltr = 1;
4177 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
4178 cmpltr = 2;
4179 else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
4180 cmpltr = 3;
4181 else if (strcasecmp (name, "<<") == 0)
4182 cmpltr = 4;
4183 else if (strcasecmp (name, "<<=") == 0)
4184 cmpltr = 5;
4185 else if (strcasecmp (name, "sv") == 0)
4186 cmpltr = 6;
4187 else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
4188 cmpltr = 7;
4189 else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
4190 {
4191 cmpltr = 0;
4192 flag = 1;
4193 }
4194 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
4195 {
4196 cmpltr = 1;
4197 flag = 1;
4198 }
4199 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
4200 {
4201 cmpltr = 2;
4202 flag = 1;
4203 }
4204 else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
4205 {
4206 cmpltr = 3;
4207 flag = 1;
4208 }
4209 else if (strcasecmp (name, ">>=") == 0)
4210 {
4211 cmpltr = 4;
4212 flag = 1;
4213 }
4214 else if (strcasecmp (name, ">>") == 0)
4215 {
4216 cmpltr = 5;
4217 flag = 1;
4218 }
4219 else if (strcasecmp (name, "nsv") == 0)
4220 {
4221 cmpltr = 6;
4222 flag = 1;
4223 }
4224 else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
4225 {
4226 cmpltr = 7;
4227 flag = 1;
4228 }
4229 /* ",*" is a valid condition. */
4230 else if (*args != 'S' || *name)
4231 as_bad (_("Invalid Compare/Subtract Condition: %s"),
4232 name);
4233 *s = c;
4234 }
4235 /* Except with "db", we have a match failure with
4236 'S' if we don't have a doubleword condition. */
4237 else if (*args == 'S' && need_cond)
4238 break;
4239
4240 opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
4241 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
4242
4243 /* Handle a non-negated compare condition. */
4244 case 't':
4245 cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr (&s);
4246 if (cmpltr < 0)
4247 {
4248 as_bad (_("Invalid Compare/Subtract Condition"));
4249 cmpltr = 0;
4250 }
4251 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
4252
4253 /* Handle a 32 bit compare and branch condition. */
4254 case 'n':
4255 save_s = s;
4256 cmpltr = pa_parse_nonneg_cmpsub_cmpltr (&s);
4257 if (cmpltr < 0)
4258 {
4259 s = save_s;
4260 cmpltr = pa_parse_neg_cmpsub_cmpltr (&s);
4261 if (cmpltr < 0)
4262 {
4263 as_bad (_("Invalid Compare and Branch Condition"));
4264 cmpltr = 0;
4265 }
4266 else
4267 {
4268 /* Negated condition requires an opcode change. */
4269 opcode |= 1 << 27;
4270 }
4271 }
4272
4273 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
4274
4275 /* Handle a 64 bit compare and branch condition. */
4276 case 'N':
4277 cmpltr = pa_parse_cmpb_64_cmpltr (&s);
4278 if (cmpltr >= 0)
4279 {
4280 /* Negated condition requires an opcode change. */
4281 opcode |= (cmpltr & 8) << 26;
4282 }
4283 else
4284 /* Not a 64 bit cond. Give 32 bit a chance. */
4285 break;
4286
4287 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr & 7, 13);
4288
4289 /* Handle a 64 bit cmpib condition. */
4290 case 'Q':
4291 cmpltr = pa_parse_cmpib_64_cmpltr (&s);
4292 if (cmpltr < 0)
4293 /* Not a 64 bit cond. Give 32 bit a chance. */
4294 break;
4295
4296 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
4297
4298 /* Handle a logical instruction condition. */
4299 case 'L':
4300 case 'l':
4301 cmpltr = 0;
4302 flag = 0;
4303 if (*s == ',')
4304 {
4305 s++;
4306
4307 /* 64 bit conditions. */
4308 if (*args == 'L')
4309 {
4310 if (*s == '*')
4311 s++;
4312 else
4313 break;
4314 }
4315 else if (*s == '*')
4316 break;
4317
4318 name = s;
4319 while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
4320 s += 1;
4321 c = *s;
4322 *s = 0x00;
4323
4324 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
4325 cmpltr = 1;
4326 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
4327 cmpltr = 2;
4328 else if (strcmp (name, "<=") == 0)
4329 cmpltr = 3;
4330 else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
4331 cmpltr = 7;
4332 else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
4333 {
4334 cmpltr = 0;
4335 flag = 1;
4336 }
4337 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
4338 {
4339 cmpltr = 1;
4340 flag = 1;
4341 }
4342 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
4343 {
4344 cmpltr = 2;
4345 flag = 1;
4346 }
4347 else if (strcmp (name, ">") == 0)
4348 {
4349 cmpltr = 3;
4350 flag = 1;
4351 }
4352 else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
4353 {
4354 cmpltr = 7;
4355 flag = 1;
4356 }
4357 /* ",*" is a valid condition. */
4358 else if (*args != 'L' || *name)
4359 as_bad (_("Invalid Logical Instruction Condition."));
4360 *s = c;
4361 }
4362 /* 32-bit is default for no condition. */
4363 else if (*args == 'L')
4364 break;
4365
4366 opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
4367 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
4368
4369 /* Handle a shift/extract/deposit condition. */
4370 case 'X':
4371 case 'x':
4372 case 'y':
4373 cmpltr = 0;
4374 /* Check immediate values in shift/extract/deposit
4375 * instructions if they will give undefined behaviour. */
4376 immediate_check = 1;
4377 if (*s == ',')
4378 {
4379 save_s = s++;
4380
4381 /* 64 bit conditions. */
4382 if (*args == 'X')
4383 {
4384 if (*s == '*')
4385 s++;
4386 else
4387 break;
4388 }
4389 else if (*s == '*')
4390 break;
4391
4392 name = s;
4393 while (*s != ',' && *s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
4394 s += 1;
4395 c = *s;
4396 *s = 0x00;
4397 if (strcmp (name, "=") == 0)
4398 cmpltr = 1;
4399 else if (strcmp (name, "<") == 0)
4400 cmpltr = 2;
4401 else if (strcasecmp (name, "od") == 0)
4402 cmpltr = 3;
4403 else if (strcasecmp (name, "tr") == 0)
4404 cmpltr = 4;
4405 else if (strcmp (name, "<>") == 0)
4406 cmpltr = 5;
4407 else if (strcmp (name, ">=") == 0)
4408 cmpltr = 6;
4409 else if (strcasecmp (name, "ev") == 0)
4410 cmpltr = 7;
4411 /* Handle movb,n. Put things back the way they were.
4412 This includes moving s back to where it started. */
4413 else if (strcasecmp (name, "n") == 0 && *args == 'y')
4414 {
4415 *s = c;
4416 s = save_s;
4417 continue;
4418 }
4419 /* ",*" is a valid condition. */
4420 else if (*args != 'X' || *name)
4421 as_bad (_("Invalid Shift/Extract/Deposit Condition."));
4422 *s = c;
4423 }
4424
4425 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, cmpltr, 13);
4426
4427 /* Handle a unit instruction condition. */
4428 case 'U':
4429 case 'u':
4430 cmpltr = 0;
4431 flag = 0;
4432 if (*s == ',')
4433 {
4434 int uxor;
4435 s++;
4436
4437 /* 64 bit conditions. */
4438 if (*args == 'U')
4439 {
4440 if (*s == '*')
4441 s++;
4442 else
4443 break;
4444 }
4445 else if (*s == '*')
4446 break;
4447
4448 /* The uxor instruction only supports unit conditions
4449 not involving carries. */
4450 uxor = (opcode & 0xfc000fc0) == 0x08000380;
4451 if (strncasecmp (s, "sbz", 3) == 0)
4452 {
4453 cmpltr = 2;
4454 s += 3;
4455 }
4456 else if (strncasecmp (s, "shz", 3) == 0)
4457 {
4458 cmpltr = 3;
4459 s += 3;
4460 }
4461 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "sdc", 3) == 0)
4462 {
4463 cmpltr = 4;
4464 s += 3;
4465 }
4466 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "sbc", 3) == 0)
4467 {
4468 cmpltr = 6;
4469 s += 3;
4470 }
4471 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "shc", 3) == 0)
4472 {
4473 cmpltr = 7;
4474 s += 3;
4475 }
4476 else if (strncasecmp (s, "tr", 2) == 0)
4477 {
4478 cmpltr = 0;
4479 flag = 1;
4480 s += 2;
4481 }
4482 else if (strncasecmp (s, "nbz", 3) == 0)
4483 {
4484 cmpltr = 2;
4485 flag = 1;
4486 s += 3;
4487 }
4488 else if (strncasecmp (s, "nhz", 3) == 0)
4489 {
4490 cmpltr = 3;
4491 flag = 1;
4492 s += 3;
4493 }
4494 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "ndc", 3) == 0)
4495 {
4496 cmpltr = 4;
4497 flag = 1;
4498 s += 3;
4499 }
4500 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "nbc", 3) == 0)
4501 {
4502 cmpltr = 6;
4503 flag = 1;
4504 s += 3;
4505 }
4506 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "nhc", 3) == 0)
4507 {
4508 cmpltr = 7;
4509 flag = 1;
4510 s += 3;
4511 }
4512 else if (strncasecmp (s, "swz", 3) == 0)
4513 {
4514 cmpltr = 1;
4515 flag = 0;
4516 s += 3;
4517 }
4518 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "swc", 3) == 0)
4519 {
4520 cmpltr = 5;
4521 flag = 0;
4522 s += 3;
4523 }
4524 else if (strncasecmp (s, "nwz", 3) == 0)
4525 {
4526 cmpltr = 1;
4527 flag = 1;
4528 s += 3;
4529 }
4530 else if (!uxor && strncasecmp (s, "nwc", 3) == 0)
4531 {
4532 cmpltr = 5;
4533 flag = 1;
4534 s += 3;
4535 }
4536 /* ",*" is a valid condition. */
4537 else if (*args != 'U' || (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t'))
4538 as_bad (_("Invalid Unit Instruction Condition."));
4539 }
4540 /* 32-bit is default for no condition. */
4541 else if (*args == 'U')
4542 break;
4543
4544 opcode |= cmpltr << 13;
4545 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 12);
4546
4547 default:
4548 abort ();
4549 }
4550 break;
4551 }
4552
4553 /* Handle a nullification completer for branch instructions. */
4554 case 'n':
4555 nullif = pa_parse_nullif (&s);
4556 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, nullif, 1);
4557
4558 /* Handle a nullification completer for copr and spop insns. */
4559 case 'N':
4560 nullif = pa_parse_nullif (&s);
4561 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, nullif, 5);
4562
4563 /* Handle ,%r2 completer for new syntax branches. */
4564 case 'L':
4565 if (*s == ',' && strncasecmp (s + 1, "%r2", 3) == 0)
4566 s += 4;
4567 else if (*s == ',' && strncasecmp (s + 1, "%rp", 3) == 0)
4568 s += 4;
4569 else
4570 break;
4571 continue;
4572
4573 /* Handle 3 bit entry into the fp compare array. Valid values
4574 are 0..6 inclusive. */
4575 case 'h':
4576 get_expression (s);
4577 s = expr_end;
4578 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4579 {
4580 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4581 CHECK_FIELD (num, 6, 0, 0);
4582 num++;
4583 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 13);
4584 }
4585 else
4586 break;
4587
4588 /* Handle 3 bit entry into the fp compare array. Valid values
4589 are 0..6 inclusive. */
4590 case 'm':
4591 get_expression (s);
4592 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4593 {
4594 s = expr_end;
4595 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4596 CHECK_FIELD (num, 6, 0, 0);
4597 num = (num + 1) ^ 1;
4598 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 13);
4599 }
4600 else
4601 break;
4602
4603 /* Handle graphics test completers for ftest */
4604 case '=':
4605 {
4606 num = pa_parse_ftest_gfx_completer (&s);
4607 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4608 }
4609
4610 /* Handle a 11 bit immediate at 31. */
4611 case 'i':
4612 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4613 get_expression (s);
4614 s = expr_end;
4615 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4616 {
4617 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4618 CHECK_FIELD (num, 1023, -1024, 0);
4619 num = low_sign_unext (num, 11);
4620 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4621 }
4622 else
4623 {
4624 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4625 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4626 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4627 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4628 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4629 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4630 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4631 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4632 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4633 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4634 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4635 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4636 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4637 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4638 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4639 #endif
4640 else
4641 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4642 the_insn.format = 11;
4643 continue;
4644 }
4645
4646 /* Handle a 14 bit immediate at 31. */
4647 case 'J':
4648 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4649 get_expression (s);
4650 s = expr_end;
4651 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4652 {
4653 int mb;
4654
4655 /* XXX the completer stored away tidbits of information
4656 for us to extract. We need a cleaner way to do this.
4657 Now that we have lots of letters again, it would be
4658 good to rethink this. */
4659 mb = opcode & 1;
4660 opcode -= mb;
4661 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4662 if (mb != (num < 0))
4663 break;
4664 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
4665 num = low_sign_unext (num, 14);
4666 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4667 }
4668 break;
4669
4670 /* Handle a 14 bit immediate at 31. */
4671 case 'K':
4672 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4673 get_expression (s);
4674 s = expr_end;
4675 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4676 {
4677 int mb;
4678
4679 mb = opcode & 1;
4680 opcode -= mb;
4681 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4682 if (mb == (num < 0))
4683 break;
4684 if (num % 4)
4685 break;
4686 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
4687 num = low_sign_unext (num, 14);
4688 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4689 }
4690 break;
4691
4692 /* Handle a 16 bit immediate at 31. */
4693 case '<':
4694 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4695 get_expression (s);
4696 s = expr_end;
4697 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4698 {
4699 int mb;
4700
4701 mb = opcode & 1;
4702 opcode -= mb;
4703 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4704 if (mb != (num < 0))
4705 break;
4706 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
4707 num = re_assemble_16 (num);
4708 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4709 }
4710 break;
4711
4712 /* Handle a 16 bit immediate at 31. */
4713 case '>':
4714 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4715 get_expression (s);
4716 s = expr_end;
4717 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4718 {
4719 int mb;
4720
4721 mb = opcode & 1;
4722 opcode -= mb;
4723 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4724 if (mb == (num < 0))
4725 break;
4726 if (num % 4)
4727 break;
4728 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
4729 num = re_assemble_16 (num);
4730 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4731 }
4732 break;
4733
4734 /* Handle 14 bit immediate, shifted left three times. */
4735 case '#':
4736 if (bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) != pa20)
4737 break;
4738 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4739 get_expression (s);
4740 s = expr_end;
4741 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4742 {
4743 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4744 if (num & 0x7)
4745 break;
4746 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
4747 if (num < 0)
4748 opcode |= 1;
4749 num &= 0x1fff;
4750 num >>= 3;
4751 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 4);
4752 }
4753 else
4754 {
4755 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4756 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4757 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4758 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4759 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4760 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4761 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4762 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4763 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4764 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4765 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4766 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4767 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4768 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4769 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4770 #endif
4771 else
4772 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4773 the_insn.format = 14;
4774 continue;
4775 }
4776 break;
4777
4778 /* Handle 14 bit immediate, shifted left twice. */
4779 case 'd':
4780 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4781 get_expression (s);
4782 s = expr_end;
4783 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4784 {
4785 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4786 if (num & 0x3)
4787 break;
4788 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
4789 if (num < 0)
4790 opcode |= 1;
4791 num &= 0x1fff;
4792 num >>= 2;
4793 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 3);
4794 }
4795 else
4796 {
4797 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4798 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4799 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4800 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4801 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4802 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4803 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4804 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4805 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4806 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4807 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4808 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4809 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4810 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4811 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4812 #endif
4813 else
4814 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4815 the_insn.format = 14;
4816 continue;
4817 }
4818
4819 /* Handle a 14 bit immediate at 31. */
4820 case 'j':
4821 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4822 get_expression (s);
4823 s = expr_end;
4824 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4825 {
4826 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4827 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
4828 num = low_sign_unext (num, 14);
4829 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
4830 }
4831 else
4832 {
4833 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4834 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4835 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4836 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4837 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4838 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4839 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4840 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4841 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4842 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4843 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4844 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4845 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4846 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4847 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4848 #endif
4849 else
4850 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4851 the_insn.format = 14;
4852 continue;
4853 }
4854
4855 /* Handle a 21 bit immediate at 31. */
4856 case 'k':
4857 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4858 get_expression (s);
4859 s = expr_end;
4860 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4861 {
4862 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4863 CHECK_FIELD (num >> 11, 1048575, -1048576, 0);
4864 opcode |= re_assemble_21 (num);
4865 continue;
4866 }
4867 else
4868 {
4869 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4870 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4871 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4872 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4873 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4874 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4875 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4876 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4877 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4878 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4879 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4880 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4881 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4882 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4883 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4884 #endif
4885 else
4886 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4887 the_insn.format = 21;
4888 continue;
4889 }
4890
4891 /* Handle a 16 bit immediate at 31 (PA 2.0 wide mode only). */
4892 case 'l':
4893 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4894 get_expression (s);
4895 s = expr_end;
4896 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4897 {
4898 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4899 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
4900 opcode |= re_assemble_16 (num);
4901 continue;
4902 }
4903 else
4904 {
4905 /* ??? Is this valid for wide mode? */
4906 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4907 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4908 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4909 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4910 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4911 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4912 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4913 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4914 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4915 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4916 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4917 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4918 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4919 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4920 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4921 #endif
4922 else
4923 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4924 the_insn.format = 14;
4925 continue;
4926 }
4927
4928 /* Handle a word-aligned 16-bit imm. at 31 (PA2.0 wide). */
4929 case 'y':
4930 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4931 get_expression (s);
4932 s = expr_end;
4933 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4934 {
4935 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4936 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
4937 CHECK_ALIGN (num, 4, 0);
4938 opcode |= re_assemble_16 (num);
4939 continue;
4940 }
4941 else
4942 {
4943 /* ??? Is this valid for wide mode? */
4944 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4945 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4946 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4947 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4948 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4949 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4950 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4951 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4952 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4953 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4954 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4955 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4956 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4957 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4958 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4959 #endif
4960 else
4961 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
4962 the_insn.format = 14;
4963 continue;
4964 }
4965
4966 /* Handle a dword-aligned 16-bit imm. at 31 (PA2.0 wide). */
4967 case '&':
4968 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
4969 get_expression (s);
4970 s = expr_end;
4971 if (the_insn.exp.X_op == O_constant)
4972 {
4973 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
4974 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, -32768, 0);
4975 CHECK_ALIGN (num, 8, 0);
4976 opcode |= re_assemble_16 (num);
4977 continue;
4978 }
4979 else
4980 {
4981 /* ??? Is this valid for wide mode? */
4982 if (is_DP_relative (the_insn.exp))
4983 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_GOTOFF;
4984 else if (is_PC_relative (the_insn.exp))
4985 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
4986 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
4987 else if (is_tls_gdidx (the_insn.exp))
4988 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L;
4989 else if (is_tls_ldidx (the_insn.exp))
4990 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L;
4991 else if (is_tls_dtpoff (the_insn.exp))
4992 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L;
4993 else if (is_tls_ieoff (the_insn.exp))
4994 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L;
4995 else if (is_tls_leoff (the_insn.exp))
4996 the_insn.reloc = R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L;
4997 #endif
4998 else
4999 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA;
5000 the_insn.format = 14;
5001 continue;
5002 }
5003
5004 /* Handle a 12 bit branch displacement. */
5005 case 'w':
5006 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
5007 get_expression (s);
5008 s = expr_end;
5009 the_insn.pcrel = 1;
5010 if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
5011 || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
5012 FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
5013 {
5014 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
5015 if (num % 4)
5016 {
5017 as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
5018 break;
5019 }
5020 if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
5021 num -= 8;
5022 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, -8192, 0);
5023 opcode |= re_assemble_12 (num >> 2);
5024 continue;
5025 }
5026 else
5027 {
5028 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
5029 the_insn.format = 12;
5030 the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
5031 memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
5032 s = expr_end;
5033 continue;
5034 }
5035
5036 /* Handle a 17 bit branch displacement. */
5037 case 'W':
5038 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
5039 get_expression (s);
5040 s = expr_end;
5041 the_insn.pcrel = 1;
5042 if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
5043 || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
5044 FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
5045 {
5046 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
5047 if (num % 4)
5048 {
5049 as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
5050 break;
5051 }
5052 if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
5053 num -= 8;
5054 CHECK_FIELD (num, 262143, -262144, 0);
5055 opcode |= re_assemble_17 (num >> 2);
5056 continue;
5057 }
5058 else
5059 {
5060 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
5061 the_insn.format = 17;
5062 the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
5063 memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
5064 continue;
5065 }
5066
5067 /* Handle a 22 bit branch displacement. */
5068 case 'X':
5069 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
5070 get_expression (s);
5071 s = expr_end;
5072 the_insn.pcrel = 1;
5073 if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
5074 || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
5075 FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
5076 {
5077 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
5078 if (num % 4)
5079 {
5080 as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
5081 break;
5082 }
5083 if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
5084 num -= 8;
5085 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8388607, -8388608, 0);
5086 opcode |= re_assemble_22 (num >> 2);
5087 }
5088 else
5089 {
5090 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL;
5091 the_insn.format = 22;
5092 the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
5093 memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
5094 continue;
5095 }
5096
5097 /* Handle an absolute 17 bit branch target. */
5098 case 'z':
5099 the_insn.field_selector = pa_chk_field_selector (&s);
5100 get_expression (s);
5101 s = expr_end;
5102 the_insn.pcrel = 0;
5103 if (!the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol
5104 || !strcmp (S_GET_NAME (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol),
5105 FAKE_LABEL_NAME))
5106 {
5107 num = evaluate_absolute (&the_insn);
5108 if (num % 4)
5109 {
5110 as_bad (_("Branch to unaligned address"));
5111 break;
5112 }
5113 if (the_insn.exp.X_add_symbol)
5114 num -= 8;
5115 CHECK_FIELD (num, 262143, -262144, 0);
5116 opcode |= re_assemble_17 (num >> 2);
5117 continue;
5118 }
5119 else
5120 {
5121 the_insn.reloc = R_HPPA_ABS_CALL;
5122 the_insn.format = 17;
5123 the_insn.arg_reloc = last_call_desc.arg_reloc;
5124 memset (&last_call_desc, 0, sizeof (struct call_desc));
5125 continue;
5126 }
5127
5128 /* Handle '%r1' implicit operand of addil instruction. */
5129 case 'Z':
5130 if (*s == ',' && *(s + 1) == '%' && *(s + 3) == '1'
5131 && (*(s + 2) == 'r' || *(s + 2) == 'R'))
5132 {
5133 s += 4;
5134 continue;
5135 }
5136 else
5137 break;
5138
5139 /* Handle '%sr0,%r31' implicit operand of be,l instruction. */
5140 case 'Y':
5141 if (strncasecmp (s, "%sr0,%r31", 9) != 0)
5142 break;
5143 s += 9;
5144 continue;
5145
5146 /* Handle immediate value of 0 for ordered load/store instructions. */
5147 case '@':
5148 if (*s != '0')
5149 break;
5150 s++;
5151 continue;
5152
5153 /* Handle a 2 bit shift count at 25. */
5154 case '.':
5155 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5156 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5157 break;
5158 s = expr_end;
5159 CHECK_FIELD (num, 3, 1, strict);
5160 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
5161
5162 /* Handle a 4 bit shift count at 25. */
5163 case '*':
5164 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5165 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5166 break;
5167 s = expr_end;
5168 CHECK_FIELD (num, 15, 0, strict);
5169 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
5170
5171 /* Handle a 5 bit shift count at 26. */
5172 case 'p':
5173 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5174 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5175 break;
5176 s = expr_end;
5177 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
5178 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
5179 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, 31 - num, 5);
5180
5181 /* Handle a 6 bit shift count at 20,22:26. */
5182 case '~':
5183 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5184 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5185 break;
5186 s = expr_end;
5187 CHECK_FIELD (num, 63, 0, strict);
5188 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
5189 num = 63 - num;
5190 opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 6;
5191 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num & 0x1f, 5);
5192
5193 /* Handle a 6 bit field length at 23,27:31. */
5194 case '%':
5195 flag = 0;
5196 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5197 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5198 break;
5199 s = expr_end;
5200 CHECK_FIELD (num, 64, 1, strict);
5201 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
5202 num--;
5203 opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 3;
5204 num = 31 - (num & 0x1f);
5205 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5206
5207 /* Handle a 6 bit field length at 19,27:31. */
5208 case '|':
5209 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5210 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5211 break;
5212 s = expr_end;
5213 CHECK_FIELD (num, 64, 1, strict);
5214 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
5215 num--;
5216 opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 7;
5217 num = 31 - (num & 0x1f);
5218 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5219
5220 /* Handle a 5 bit bit position at 26. */
5221 case 'P':
5222 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5223 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5224 break;
5225 s = expr_end;
5226 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
5227 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
5228 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 5);
5229
5230 /* Handle a 6 bit bit position at 20,22:26. */
5231 case 'q':
5232 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5233 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5234 break;
5235 s = expr_end;
5236 CHECK_FIELD (num, 63, 0, strict);
5237 SAVE_IMMEDIATE(num);
5238 opcode |= (num & 0x20) << 6;
5239 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num & 0x1f, 5);
5240
5241 /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 10 with 'd' as the complement
5242 of the high bit of the immediate. */
5243 case 'B':
5244 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5245 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5246 break;
5247 s = expr_end;
5248 CHECK_FIELD (num, 63, 0, strict);
5249 if (num & 0x20)
5250 ;
5251 else
5252 opcode |= (1 << 13);
5253 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num & 0x1f, 21);
5254
5255 /* Handle a 5 bit immediate at 10. */
5256 case 'Q':
5257 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5258 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5259 break;
5260 s = expr_end;
5261 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, strict);
5262 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
5263
5264 /* Handle a 9 bit immediate at 28. */
5265 case '$':
5266 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5267 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5268 break;
5269 s = expr_end;
5270 CHECK_FIELD (num, 511, 1, strict);
5271 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 3);
5272
5273 /* Handle a 13 bit immediate at 18. */
5274 case 'A':
5275 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5276 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5277 break;
5278 s = expr_end;
5279 CHECK_FIELD (num, 8191, 0, strict);
5280 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 13);
5281
5282 /* Handle a 26 bit immediate at 31. */
5283 case 'D':
5284 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5285 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5286 break;
5287 s = expr_end;
5288 CHECK_FIELD (num, 67108863, 0, strict);
5289 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5290
5291 /* Handle a 3 bit SFU identifier at 25. */
5292 case 'v':
5293 if (*s++ != ',')
5294 as_bad (_("Invalid SFU identifier"));
5295 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5296 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5297 break;
5298 s = expr_end;
5299 CHECK_FIELD (num, 7, 0, strict);
5300 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
5301
5302 /* Handle a 20 bit SOP field for spop0. */
5303 case 'O':
5304 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5305 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5306 break;
5307 s = expr_end;
5308 CHECK_FIELD (num, 1048575, 0, strict);
5309 num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x000fffe0) << 6);
5310 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5311
5312 /* Handle a 15bit SOP field for spop1. */
5313 case 'o':
5314 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5315 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5316 break;
5317 s = expr_end;
5318 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, 0, strict);
5319 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 11);
5320
5321 /* Handle a 10bit SOP field for spop3. */
5322 case '0':
5323 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5324 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5325 break;
5326 s = expr_end;
5327 CHECK_FIELD (num, 1023, 0, strict);
5328 num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x000003e0) << 6);
5329 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5330
5331 /* Handle a 15 bit SOP field for spop2. */
5332 case '1':
5333 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5334 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5335 break;
5336 s = expr_end;
5337 CHECK_FIELD (num, 32767, 0, strict);
5338 num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x00007fe0) << 6);
5339 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5340
5341 /* Handle a 3-bit co-processor ID field. */
5342 case 'u':
5343 if (*s++ != ',')
5344 as_bad (_("Invalid COPR identifier"));
5345 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5346 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5347 break;
5348 s = expr_end;
5349 CHECK_FIELD (num, 7, 0, strict);
5350 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
5351
5352 /* Handle a 22bit SOP field for copr. */
5353 case '2':
5354 num = pa_get_absolute_expression (&the_insn, &s);
5355 if (strict && the_insn.exp.X_op != O_constant)
5356 break;
5357 s = expr_end;
5358 CHECK_FIELD (num, 4194303, 0, strict);
5359 num = (num & 0x1f) | ((num & 0x003fffe0) << 4);
5360 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5361
5362 /* Handle a source FP operand format completer. */
5363 case '{':
5364 if (*s == ',' && *(s+1) == 't')
5365 {
5366 the_insn.trunc = 1;
5367 s += 2;
5368 }
5369 else
5370 the_insn.trunc = 0;
5371 flag = pa_parse_fp_cnv_format (&s);
5372 the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
5373 if (flag == W || flag == UW)
5374 flag = SGL;
5375 if (flag == DW || flag == UDW)
5376 flag = DBL;
5377 if (flag == QW || flag == UQW)
5378 flag = QUAD;
5379 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
5380
5381 /* Handle a destination FP operand format completer. */
5382 case '_':
5383 /* pa_parse_format needs the ',' prefix. */
5384 s--;
5385 flag = pa_parse_fp_cnv_format (&s);
5386 the_insn.fpof2 = flag;
5387 if (flag == W || flag == UW)
5388 flag = SGL;
5389 if (flag == DW || flag == UDW)
5390 flag = DBL;
5391 if (flag == QW || flag == UQW)
5392 flag = QUAD;
5393 opcode |= flag << 13;
5394 if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL
5395 || the_insn.fpof1 == DBL
5396 || the_insn.fpof1 == QUAD)
5397 {
5398 if (the_insn.fpof2 == SGL
5399 || the_insn.fpof2 == DBL
5400 || the_insn.fpof2 == QUAD)
5401 flag = 0;
5402 else if (the_insn.fpof2 == W
5403 || the_insn.fpof2 == DW
5404 || the_insn.fpof2 == QW)
5405 flag = 2;
5406 else if (the_insn.fpof2 == UW
5407 || the_insn.fpof2 == UDW
5408 || the_insn.fpof2 == UQW)
5409 flag = 6;
5410 else
5411 abort ();
5412 }
5413 else if (the_insn.fpof1 == W
5414 || the_insn.fpof1 == DW
5415 || the_insn.fpof1 == QW)
5416 {
5417 if (the_insn.fpof2 == SGL
5418 || the_insn.fpof2 == DBL
5419 || the_insn.fpof2 == QUAD)
5420 flag = 1;
5421 else
5422 abort ();
5423 }
5424 else if (the_insn.fpof1 == UW
5425 || the_insn.fpof1 == UDW
5426 || the_insn.fpof1 == UQW)
5427 {
5428 if (the_insn.fpof2 == SGL
5429 || the_insn.fpof2 == DBL
5430 || the_insn.fpof2 == QUAD)
5431 flag = 5;
5432 else
5433 abort ();
5434 }
5435 flag |= the_insn.trunc;
5436 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 15);
5437
5438 /* Handle a source FP operand format completer. */
5439 case 'F':
5440 flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
5441 the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
5442 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
5443
5444 /* Handle a destination FP operand format completer. */
5445 case 'G':
5446 /* pa_parse_format needs the ',' prefix. */
5447 s--;
5448 flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
5449 the_insn.fpof2 = flag;
5450 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 13);
5451
5452 /* Handle a source FP operand format completer at 20. */
5453 case 'I':
5454 flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
5455 the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
5456 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, flag, 11);
5457
5458 /* Handle a floating point operand format at 26.
5459 Only allows single and double precision. */
5460 case 'H':
5461 flag = pa_parse_fp_format (&s);
5462 switch (flag)
5463 {
5464 case SGL:
5465 opcode |= 0x20;
5466 case DBL:
5467 the_insn.fpof1 = flag;
5468 continue;
5469
5470 case QUAD:
5471 case ILLEGAL_FMT:
5472 default:
5473 as_bad (_("Invalid Floating Point Operand Format."));
5474 }
5475 break;
5476
5477 /* Handle all floating point registers. */
5478 case 'f':
5479 switch (*++args)
5480 {
5481 /* Float target register. */
5482 case 't':
5483 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 3))
5484 break;
5485 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5486 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5487 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5488
5489 /* Float target register with L/R selection. */
5490 case 'T':
5491 {
5492 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5493 break;
5494 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5495 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5496 opcode |= num;
5497
5498 /* 0x30 opcodes are FP arithmetic operation opcodes
5499 and need to be turned into 0x38 opcodes. This
5500 is not necessary for loads/stores. */
5501 if (need_pa11_opcode ()
5502 && ((opcode & 0xfc000000) == 0x30000000))
5503 opcode |= 1 << 27;
5504
5505 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 6 : 0);
5506 continue;
5507 }
5508
5509 /* Float operand 1. */
5510 case 'a':
5511 {
5512 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5513 break;
5514 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5515 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5516 opcode |= num << 21;
5517 if (need_pa11_opcode ())
5518 {
5519 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 7 : 0);
5520 opcode |= 1 << 27;
5521 }
5522 continue;
5523 }
5524
5525 /* Float operand 1 with L/R selection. */
5526 case 'X':
5527 case 'A':
5528 {
5529 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5530 break;
5531 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5532 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5533 opcode |= num << 21;
5534 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 7 : 0);
5535 continue;
5536 }
5537
5538 /* Float operand 2. */
5539 case 'b':
5540 {
5541 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5542 break;
5543 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5544 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5545 opcode |= num << 16;
5546 if (need_pa11_opcode ())
5547 {
5548 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 12 : 0);
5549 opcode |= 1 << 27;
5550 }
5551 continue;
5552 }
5553
5554 /* Float operand 2 with L/R selection. */
5555 case 'B':
5556 {
5557 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5558 break;
5559 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5560 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5561 opcode |= num << 16;
5562 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 12 : 0);
5563 continue;
5564 }
5565
5566 /* Float operand 3 for fmpyfadd, fmpynfadd. */
5567 case 'C':
5568 {
5569 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5570 break;
5571 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5572 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5573 opcode |= (num & 0x1c) << 11;
5574 opcode |= (num & 0x03) << 9;
5575 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 8 : 0);
5576 continue;
5577 }
5578
5579 /* Float mult operand 1 for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
5580 case 'i':
5581 {
5582 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5583 break;
5584 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5585 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5586 if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
5587 {
5588 if (num < 16)
5589 {
5590 as_bad (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
5591 break;
5592 }
5593 num &= 0xF;
5594 num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
5595 }
5596 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 21);
5597 }
5598
5599 /* Float mult operand 2 for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
5600 case 'j':
5601 {
5602 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5603 break;
5604 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5605 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5606 if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
5607 {
5608 if (num < 16)
5609 {
5610 as_bad (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
5611 break;
5612 }
5613 num &= 0xF;
5614 num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
5615 }
5616 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
5617 }
5618
5619 /* Float mult target for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
5620 case 'k':
5621 {
5622 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5623 break;
5624 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5625 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5626 if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
5627 {
5628 if (num < 16)
5629 {
5630 as_bad (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
5631 break;
5632 }
5633 num &= 0xF;
5634 num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
5635 }
5636 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 0);
5637 }
5638
5639 /* Float add operand 1 for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
5640 case 'l':
5641 {
5642 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5643 break;
5644 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5645 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5646 if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
5647 {
5648 if (num < 16)
5649 {
5650 as_bad (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
5651 break;
5652 }
5653 num &= 0xF;
5654 num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
5655 }
5656 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 6);
5657 }
5658
5659 /* Float add target for fmpyadd, fmpysub */
5660 case 'm':
5661 {
5662 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5663 break;
5664 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5665 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5666 if (the_insn.fpof1 == SGL)
5667 {
5668 if (num < 16)
5669 {
5670 as_bad (_("Invalid register for single precision fmpyadd or fmpysub"));
5671 break;
5672 }
5673 num &= 0xF;
5674 num |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 4 : 0);
5675 }
5676 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 11);
5677 }
5678
5679 /* Handle L/R register halves like 'x'. */
5680 case 'E':
5681 case 'e':
5682 {
5683 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 1))
5684 break;
5685 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5686 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5687 opcode |= num << 16;
5688 if (need_pa11_opcode ())
5689 {
5690 opcode |= (pa_number & FP_REG_RSEL ? 1 << 1 : 0);
5691 }
5692 continue;
5693 }
5694
5695 /* Float target register (PA 2.0 wide). */
5696 case 'x':
5697 if (!pa_parse_number (&s, 3))
5698 break;
5699 num = (pa_number & ~FP_REG_RSEL) - FP_REG_BASE;
5700 CHECK_FIELD (num, 31, 0, 0);
5701 INSERT_FIELD_AND_CONTINUE (opcode, num, 16);
5702
5703 default:
5704 abort ();
5705 }
5706 break;
5707
5708 default:
5709 abort ();
5710 }
5711 break;
5712 }
5713
5714 /* If this instruction is specific to a particular architecture,
5715 then set a new architecture. This automatic promotion crud is
5716 for compatibility with HP's old assemblers only. */
5717 if (match == TRUE
5718 && bfd_get_mach (stdoutput) < insn->arch
5719 && !bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, insn->arch))
5720 {
5721 as_warn (_("could not update architecture and machine"));
5722 match = FALSE;
5723 }
5724
5725 failed:
5726 /* Check if the args matched. */
5727 if (!match)
5728 {
5729 if (&insn[1] - pa_opcodes < (int) NUMOPCODES
5730 && !strcmp (insn->name, insn[1].name))
5731 {
5732 ++insn;
5733 s = argstart;
5734 continue;
5735 }
5736 else
5737 {
5738 as_bad (_("Invalid operands %s"), error_message);
5739 return;
5740 }
5741 }
5742 break;
5743 }
5744
5745 if (immediate_check)
5746 {
5747 if (pos != -1 && len != -1 && pos < len - 1)
5748 as_warn (_("Immediates %d and %d will give undefined behavior."),
5749 pos, len);
5750 }
5751
5752 the_insn.opcode = opcode;
5753 }
5754
5755 /* Assemble a single instruction storing it into a frag. */
5756
5757 void
5758 md_assemble (char *str)
5759 {
5760 char *to;
5761
5762 /* The had better be something to assemble. */
5763 gas_assert (str);
5764
5765 /* If we are within a procedure definition, make sure we've
5766 defined a label for the procedure; handle case where the
5767 label was defined after the .PROC directive.
5768
5769 Note there's not need to diddle with the segment or fragment
5770 for the label symbol in this case. We have already switched
5771 into the new $CODE$ subspace at this point. */
5772 if (within_procedure && last_call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
5773 {
5774 label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
5775
5776 if (label_symbol)
5777 {
5778 if (label_symbol->lss_label)
5779 {
5780 last_call_info->start_symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
5781 symbol_get_bfdsym (label_symbol->lss_label)->flags
5782 |= BSF_FUNCTION;
5783 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
5784 /* Also handle allocation of a fixup to hold the unwind
5785 information when the label appears after the proc/procend. */
5786 if (within_entry_exit)
5787 {
5788 char *where;
5789 unsigned int u;
5790
5791 where = frag_more (0);
5792 u = UNWIND_LOW32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
5793 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
5794 NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
5795 0, R_HPPA_ENTRY, e_fsel, 0, 0, u);
5796 }
5797 #endif
5798 }
5799 else
5800 as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC (corrupted label chain)"));
5801 }
5802 else
5803 as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC"));
5804 }
5805
5806 /* Assemble the instruction. Results are saved into "the_insn". */
5807 pa_ip (str);
5808
5809 /* Get somewhere to put the assembled instruction. */
5810 to = frag_more (4);
5811
5812 /* Output the opcode. */
5813 md_number_to_chars (to, the_insn.opcode, 4);
5814
5815 /* If necessary output more stuff. */
5816 if (the_insn.reloc != R_HPPA_NONE)
5817 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, (to - frag_now->fr_literal), 4, NULL,
5818 (offsetT) 0, &the_insn.exp, the_insn.pcrel,
5819 the_insn.reloc, the_insn.field_selector,
5820 the_insn.format, the_insn.arg_reloc, 0);
5821
5822 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
5823 dwarf2_emit_insn (4);
5824 #endif
5825 }
5826
5827 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
5828 /* Handle an alignment directive. Special so that we can update the
5829 alignment of the subspace if necessary. */
5830 static void
5831 pa_align (int bytes)
5832 {
5833 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
5834 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
5835
5836 /* Let the generic gas code do most of the work. */
5837 s_align_bytes (bytes);
5838
5839 /* If bytes is a power of 2, then update the current subspace's
5840 alignment if necessary. */
5841 if (exact_log2 (bytes) != -1)
5842 record_alignment (current_subspace->ssd_seg, exact_log2 (bytes));
5843 }
5844 #endif
5845
5846 /* Handle a .BLOCK type pseudo-op. */
5847
5848 static void
5849 pa_block (int z ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5850 {
5851 unsigned int temp_size;
5852
5853 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
5854 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
5855 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
5856 #endif
5857
5858 temp_size = get_absolute_expression ();
5859
5860 if (temp_size > 0x3FFFFFFF)
5861 {
5862 as_bad (_("Argument to .BLOCK/.BLOCKZ must be between 0 and 0x3fffffff"));
5863 temp_size = 0;
5864 }
5865 else
5866 {
5867 /* Always fill with zeros, that's what the HP assembler does. */
5868 char *p = frag_var (rs_fill, 1, 1, 0, NULL, temp_size, NULL);
5869 *p = 0;
5870 }
5871
5872 pa_undefine_label ();
5873 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
5874 }
5875
5876 /* Handle a .begin_brtab and .end_brtab pseudo-op. */
5877
5878 static void
5879 pa_brtab (int begin ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5880 {
5881
5882 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
5883 /* The BRTAB relocations are only available in SOM (to denote
5884 the beginning and end of branch tables). */
5885 char *where = frag_more (0);
5886
5887 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
5888 NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
5889 0, begin ? R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB : R_HPPA_END_BRTAB,
5890 e_fsel, 0, 0, 0);
5891 #endif
5892
5893 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
5894 }
5895
5896 /* Handle a .begin_try and .end_try pseudo-op. */
5897
5898 static void
5899 pa_try (int begin ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5900 {
5901 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
5902 expressionS exp;
5903 char *where = frag_more (0);
5904
5905 if (! begin)
5906 expression (&exp);
5907
5908 /* The TRY relocations are only available in SOM (to denote
5909 the beginning and end of exception handling regions). */
5910
5911 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
5912 NULL, (offsetT) 0, begin ? NULL : &exp,
5913 0, begin ? R_HPPA_BEGIN_TRY : R_HPPA_END_TRY,
5914 e_fsel, 0, 0, 0);
5915 #endif
5916
5917 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
5918 }
5919
5920 /* Do the dirty work of building a call descriptor which describes
5921 where the caller placed arguments to a function call. */
5922
5923 static void
5924 pa_call_args (struct call_desc *call_desc)
5925 {
5926 char *name, c, *p;
5927 unsigned int temp, arg_reloc;
5928
5929 while (!is_end_of_statement ())
5930 {
5931 name = input_line_pointer;
5932 c = get_symbol_end ();
5933 /* Process a source argument. */
5934 if ((strncasecmp (name, "argw", 4) == 0))
5935 {
5936 temp = atoi (name + 4);
5937 p = input_line_pointer;
5938 *p = c;
5939 input_line_pointer++;
5940 name = input_line_pointer;
5941 c = get_symbol_end ();
5942 arg_reloc = pa_build_arg_reloc (name);
5943 call_desc->arg_reloc |= pa_align_arg_reloc (temp, arg_reloc);
5944 }
5945 /* Process a return value. */
5946 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "rtnval", 6) == 0))
5947 {
5948 p = input_line_pointer;
5949 *p = c;
5950 input_line_pointer++;
5951 name = input_line_pointer;
5952 c = get_symbol_end ();
5953 arg_reloc = pa_build_arg_reloc (name);
5954 call_desc->arg_reloc |= (arg_reloc & 0x3);
5955 }
5956 else
5957 {
5958 as_bad (_("Invalid .CALL argument: %s"), name);
5959 }
5960 p = input_line_pointer;
5961 *p = c;
5962 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
5963 input_line_pointer++;
5964 }
5965 }
5966
5967 /* Handle a .CALL pseudo-op. This involves storing away information
5968 about where arguments are to be found so the linker can detect
5969 (and correct) argument location mismatches between caller and callee. */
5970
5971 static void
5972 pa_call (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
5973 {
5974 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
5975 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
5976 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
5977 #endif
5978
5979 pa_call_args (&last_call_desc);
5980 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
5981 }
5982
5983 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
5984 /* Build an entry in the UNWIND subspace from the given function
5985 attributes in CALL_INFO. This is not needed for SOM as using
5986 R_ENTRY and R_EXIT relocations allow the linker to handle building
5987 of the unwind spaces. */
5988
5989 static void
5990 pa_build_unwind_subspace (struct call_info *call_info)
5991 {
5992 asection *seg, *save_seg;
5993 subsegT save_subseg;
5994 unsigned int unwind;
5995 int reloc;
5996 char *name, *p;
5997 symbolS *symbolP;
5998
5999 if ((bfd_get_section_flags (stdoutput, now_seg)
6000 & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY))
6001 != (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD | SEC_READONLY))
6002 return;
6003
6004 if (call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
6005 /* This can happen if there were errors earlier on in the assembly. */
6006 return;
6007
6008 /* Replace the start symbol with a local symbol that will be reduced
6009 to a section offset. This avoids problems with weak functions with
6010 multiple definitions, etc. */
6011 name = xmalloc (strlen ("L$\001start_")
6012 + strlen (S_GET_NAME (call_info->start_symbol))
6013 + 1);
6014 strcpy (name, "L$\001start_");
6015 strcat (name, S_GET_NAME (call_info->start_symbol));
6016
6017 /* If we have a .procend preceded by a .exit, then the symbol will have
6018 already been defined. In that case, we don't want another unwind
6019 entry. */
6020 symbolP = symbol_find (name);
6021 if (symbolP)
6022 {
6023 xfree (name);
6024 return;
6025 }
6026 else
6027 {
6028 symbolP = symbol_new (name, now_seg,
6029 S_GET_VALUE (call_info->start_symbol), frag_now);
6030 gas_assert (symbolP);
6031 S_CLEAR_EXTERNAL (symbolP);
6032 symbol_table_insert (symbolP);
6033 }
6034
6035 reloc = R_PARISC_SEGREL32;
6036 save_seg = now_seg;
6037 save_subseg = now_subseg;
6038 /* Get into the right seg/subseg. This may involve creating
6039 the seg the first time through. Make sure to have the
6040 old seg/subseg so that we can reset things when we are done. */
6041 seg = bfd_get_section_by_name (stdoutput, UNWIND_SECTION_NAME);
6042 if (seg == ASEC_NULL)
6043 {
6044 seg = subseg_new (UNWIND_SECTION_NAME, 0);
6045 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, seg,
6046 SEC_READONLY | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS
6047 | SEC_LOAD | SEC_RELOC | SEC_ALLOC | SEC_DATA);
6048 bfd_set_section_alignment (stdoutput, seg, 2);
6049 }
6050
6051 subseg_set (seg, 0);
6052
6053 /* Get some space to hold relocation information for the unwind
6054 descriptor. */
6055 p = frag_more (16);
6056
6057 /* Relocation info. for start offset of the function. */
6058 md_number_to_chars (p, 0, 4);
6059 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, p - frag_now->fr_literal, 4,
6060 symbolP, (offsetT) 0,
6061 (expressionS *) NULL, 0, reloc,
6062 e_fsel, 32, 0, 0);
6063
6064 /* Relocation info. for end offset of the function.
6065
6066 Because we allow reductions of 32bit relocations for ELF, this will be
6067 reduced to section_sym + offset which avoids putting the temporary
6068 symbol into the symbol table. It (should) end up giving the same
6069 value as call_info->start_symbol + function size once the linker is
6070 finished with its work. */
6071 md_number_to_chars (p + 4, 0, 4);
6072 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, p + 4 - frag_now->fr_literal, 4,
6073 call_info->end_symbol, (offsetT) 0,
6074 (expressionS *) NULL, 0, reloc,
6075 e_fsel, 32, 0, 0);
6076
6077 /* Dump the descriptor. */
6078 unwind = UNWIND_LOW32 (&call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
6079 md_number_to_chars (p + 8, unwind, 4);
6080
6081 unwind = UNWIND_HIGH32 (&call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
6082 md_number_to_chars (p + 12, unwind, 4);
6083
6084 /* Return back to the original segment/subsegment. */
6085 subseg_set (save_seg, save_subseg);
6086 }
6087 #endif
6088
6089 /* Process a .CALLINFO pseudo-op. This information is used later
6090 to build unwind descriptors and maybe one day to support
6091 .ENTER and .LEAVE. */
6092
6093 static void
6094 pa_callinfo (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6095 {
6096 char *name, c, *p;
6097 int temp;
6098
6099 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6100 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6101 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6102 #endif
6103
6104 /* .CALLINFO must appear within a procedure definition. */
6105 if (!within_procedure)
6106 as_bad (_(".callinfo is not within a procedure definition"));
6107
6108 /* Mark the fact that we found the .CALLINFO for the
6109 current procedure. */
6110 callinfo_found = TRUE;
6111
6112 /* Iterate over the .CALLINFO arguments. */
6113 while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6114 {
6115 name = input_line_pointer;
6116 c = get_symbol_end ();
6117 /* Frame size specification. */
6118 if ((strncasecmp (name, "frame", 5) == 0))
6119 {
6120 p = input_line_pointer;
6121 *p = c;
6122 input_line_pointer++;
6123 temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6124 if ((temp & 0x3) != 0)
6125 {
6126 as_bad (_("FRAME parameter must be a multiple of 8: %d\n"), temp);
6127 temp = 0;
6128 }
6129
6130 /* callinfo is in bytes and unwind_desc is in 8 byte units. */
6131 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.frame_size = temp / 8;
6132
6133 }
6134 /* Entry register (GR, GR and SR) specifications. */
6135 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "entry_gr", 8) == 0))
6136 {
6137 p = input_line_pointer;
6138 *p = c;
6139 input_line_pointer++;
6140 temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6141 /* The HP assembler accepts 19 as the high bound for ENTRY_GR
6142 even though %r19 is caller saved. I think this is a bug in
6143 the HP assembler, and we are not going to emulate it. */
6144 if (temp < 3 || temp > 18)
6145 as_bad (_("Value for ENTRY_GR must be in the range 3..18\n"));
6146 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.entry_gr = temp - 2;
6147 }
6148 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "entry_fr", 8) == 0))
6149 {
6150 p = input_line_pointer;
6151 *p = c;
6152 input_line_pointer++;
6153 temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6154 /* Similarly the HP assembler takes 31 as the high bound even
6155 though %fr21 is the last callee saved floating point register. */
6156 if (temp < 12 || temp > 21)
6157 as_bad (_("Value for ENTRY_FR must be in the range 12..21\n"));
6158 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.entry_fr = temp - 11;
6159 }
6160 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "entry_sr", 8) == 0))
6161 {
6162 p = input_line_pointer;
6163 *p = c;
6164 input_line_pointer++;
6165 temp = get_absolute_expression ();
6166 if (temp != 3)
6167 as_bad (_("Value for ENTRY_SR must be 3\n"));
6168 }
6169 /* Note whether or not this function performs any calls. */
6170 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "calls", 5) == 0) ||
6171 (strncasecmp (name, "caller", 6) == 0))
6172 {
6173 p = input_line_pointer;
6174 *p = c;
6175 }
6176 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "no_calls", 8) == 0))
6177 {
6178 p = input_line_pointer;
6179 *p = c;
6180 }
6181 /* Should RP be saved into the stack. */
6182 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "save_rp", 7) == 0))
6183 {
6184 p = input_line_pointer;
6185 *p = c;
6186 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.save_rp = 1;
6187 }
6188 /* Likewise for SP. */
6189 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "save_sp", 7) == 0))
6190 {
6191 p = input_line_pointer;
6192 *p = c;
6193 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.save_sp = 1;
6194 }
6195 /* Is this an unwindable procedure. If so mark it so
6196 in the unwind descriptor. */
6197 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "no_unwind", 9) == 0))
6198 {
6199 p = input_line_pointer;
6200 *p = c;
6201 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.cannot_unwind = 1;
6202 }
6203 /* Is this an interrupt routine. If so mark it in the
6204 unwind descriptor. */
6205 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "hpux_int", 7) == 0))
6206 {
6207 p = input_line_pointer;
6208 *p = c;
6209 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.hpux_interrupt_marker = 1;
6210 }
6211 /* Is this a millicode routine. "millicode" isn't in my
6212 assembler manual, but my copy is old. The HP assembler
6213 accepts it, and there's a place in the unwind descriptor
6214 to drop the information, so we'll accept it too. */
6215 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "millicode", 9) == 0))
6216 {
6217 p = input_line_pointer;
6218 *p = c;
6219 last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.millicode = 1;
6220 }
6221 else
6222 {
6223 as_bad (_("Invalid .CALLINFO argument: %s"), name);
6224 *input_line_pointer = c;
6225 }
6226 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6227 input_line_pointer++;
6228 }
6229
6230 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6231 }
6232
6233 #if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
6234 /* Switch to the text space. Like s_text, but delete our
6235 label when finished. */
6236
6237 static void
6238 pa_text (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6239 {
6240 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6241 current_space = is_defined_space ("$TEXT$");
6242 current_subspace
6243 = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (current_space->sd_seg, 0);
6244 #endif
6245
6246 s_text (0);
6247 pa_undefine_label ();
6248 }
6249
6250 /* Switch to the data space. As usual delete our label. */
6251
6252 static void
6253 pa_data (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6254 {
6255 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6256 current_space = is_defined_space ("$PRIVATE$");
6257 current_subspace
6258 = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (current_space->sd_seg, 0);
6259 #endif
6260 s_data (0);
6261 pa_undefine_label ();
6262 }
6263
6264 /* This is different than the standard GAS s_comm(). On HP9000/800 machines,
6265 the .comm pseudo-op has the following syntax:
6266
6267 <label> .comm <length>
6268
6269 where <label> is optional and is a symbol whose address will be the start of
6270 a block of memory <length> bytes long. <length> must be an absolute
6271 expression. <length> bytes will be allocated in the current space
6272 and subspace.
6273
6274 Also note the label may not even be on the same line as the .comm.
6275
6276 This difference in syntax means the colon function will be called
6277 on the symbol before we arrive in pa_comm. colon will set a number
6278 of attributes of the symbol that need to be fixed here. In particular
6279 the value, section pointer, fragment pointer, flags, etc. What
6280 a pain.
6281
6282 This also makes error detection all but impossible. */
6283
6284 static void
6285 pa_comm (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6286 {
6287 unsigned int size;
6288 symbolS *symbol;
6289 label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
6290
6291 if (label_symbol)
6292 symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
6293 else
6294 symbol = NULL;
6295
6296 SKIP_WHITESPACE ();
6297 size = get_absolute_expression ();
6298
6299 if (symbol)
6300 {
6301 symbol_get_bfdsym (symbol)->flags |= BSF_OBJECT;
6302 S_SET_VALUE (symbol, size);
6303 S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, bfd_com_section_ptr);
6304 S_SET_EXTERNAL (symbol);
6305
6306 /* colon() has already set the frag to the current location in the
6307 current subspace; we need to reset the fragment to the zero address
6308 fragment. We also need to reset the segment pointer. */
6309 symbol_set_frag (symbol, &zero_address_frag);
6310 }
6311 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6312 }
6313 #endif /* !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD))) */
6314
6315 /* Process a .END pseudo-op. */
6316
6317 static void
6318 pa_end (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6319 {
6320 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6321 }
6322
6323 /* Process a .ENTER pseudo-op. This is not supported. */
6324
6325 static void
6326 pa_enter (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6327 {
6328 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6329 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6330 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6331 #endif
6332
6333 as_bad (_("The .ENTER pseudo-op is not supported"));
6334 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6335 }
6336
6337 /* Process a .ENTRY pseudo-op. .ENTRY marks the beginning of the
6338 procedure. */
6339
6340 static void
6341 pa_entry (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6342 {
6343 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6344 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6345 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6346 #endif
6347
6348 if (!within_procedure)
6349 as_bad (_("Misplaced .entry. Ignored."));
6350 else
6351 {
6352 if (!callinfo_found)
6353 as_bad (_("Missing .callinfo."));
6354 }
6355 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6356 within_entry_exit = TRUE;
6357
6358 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6359 /* SOM defers building of unwind descriptors until the link phase.
6360 The assembler is responsible for creating an R_ENTRY relocation
6361 to mark the beginning of a region and hold the unwind bits, and
6362 for creating an R_EXIT relocation to mark the end of the region.
6363
6364 FIXME. ELF should be using the same conventions! The problem
6365 is an unwind requires too much relocation space. Hmmm. Maybe
6366 if we split the unwind bits up between the relocations which
6367 denote the entry and exit points. */
6368 if (last_call_info->start_symbol != NULL)
6369 {
6370 char *where;
6371 unsigned int u;
6372
6373 where = frag_more (0);
6374 u = UNWIND_LOW32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
6375 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
6376 NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
6377 0, R_HPPA_ENTRY, e_fsel, 0, 0, u);
6378 }
6379 #endif
6380 }
6381
6382 /* Silly nonsense for pa_equ. The only half-sensible use for this is
6383 being able to subtract two register symbols that specify a range of
6384 registers, to get the size of the range. */
6385 static int fudge_reg_expressions;
6386
6387 int
6388 hppa_force_reg_syms_absolute (expressionS *resultP,
6389 operatorT op ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
6390 expressionS *rightP)
6391 {
6392 if (fudge_reg_expressions
6393 && rightP->X_op == O_register
6394 && resultP->X_op == O_register)
6395 {
6396 rightP->X_op = O_constant;
6397 resultP->X_op = O_constant;
6398 }
6399 return 0; /* Continue normal expr handling. */
6400 }
6401
6402 /* Handle a .EQU pseudo-op. */
6403
6404 static void
6405 pa_equ (int reg)
6406 {
6407 label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
6408 symbolS *symbol;
6409
6410 if (label_symbol)
6411 {
6412 symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
6413 if (reg)
6414 {
6415 strict = 1;
6416 if (!pa_parse_number (&input_line_pointer, 0))
6417 as_bad (_(".REG expression must be a register"));
6418 S_SET_VALUE (symbol, pa_number);
6419 S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, reg_section);
6420 }
6421 else
6422 {
6423 expressionS exp;
6424 segT seg;
6425
6426 fudge_reg_expressions = 1;
6427 seg = expression (&exp);
6428 fudge_reg_expressions = 0;
6429 if (exp.X_op != O_constant
6430 && exp.X_op != O_register)
6431 {
6432 if (exp.X_op != O_absent)
6433 as_bad (_("bad or irreducible absolute expression; zero assumed"));
6434 exp.X_add_number = 0;
6435 seg = absolute_section;
6436 }
6437 S_SET_VALUE (symbol, (unsigned int) exp.X_add_number);
6438 S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, seg);
6439 }
6440 }
6441 else
6442 {
6443 if (reg)
6444 as_bad (_(".REG must use a label"));
6445 else
6446 as_bad (_(".EQU must use a label"));
6447 }
6448
6449 pa_undefine_label ();
6450 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6451 }
6452
6453 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
6454 /* Mark the end of a function so that it's possible to compute
6455 the size of the function in elf_hppa_final_processing. */
6456
6457 static void
6458 hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function (void)
6459 {
6460 /* ELF does not have EXIT relocations. All we do is create a
6461 temporary symbol marking the end of the function. */
6462 char *name;
6463
6464 if (last_call_info == NULL || last_call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
6465 {
6466 /* We have already warned about a missing label,
6467 or other problems. */
6468 return;
6469 }
6470
6471 name = xmalloc (strlen ("L$\001end_")
6472 + strlen (S_GET_NAME (last_call_info->start_symbol))
6473 + 1);
6474 if (name)
6475 {
6476 symbolS *symbolP;
6477
6478 strcpy (name, "L$\001end_");
6479 strcat (name, S_GET_NAME (last_call_info->start_symbol));
6480
6481 /* If we have a .exit followed by a .procend, then the
6482 symbol will have already been defined. */
6483 symbolP = symbol_find (name);
6484 if (symbolP)
6485 {
6486 /* The symbol has already been defined! This can
6487 happen if we have a .exit followed by a .procend.
6488
6489 This is *not* an error. All we want to do is free
6490 the memory we just allocated for the name and continue. */
6491 xfree (name);
6492 }
6493 else
6494 {
6495 /* symbol value should be the offset of the
6496 last instruction of the function */
6497 symbolP = symbol_new (name, now_seg, (valueT) (frag_now_fix () - 4),
6498 frag_now);
6499
6500 gas_assert (symbolP);
6501 S_CLEAR_EXTERNAL (symbolP);
6502 symbol_table_insert (symbolP);
6503 }
6504
6505 if (symbolP)
6506 last_call_info->end_symbol = symbolP;
6507 else
6508 as_bad (_("Symbol '%s' could not be created."), name);
6509
6510 }
6511 else
6512 as_bad (_("No memory for symbol name."));
6513 }
6514 #endif
6515
6516 /* Helper function. Does processing for the end of a function. This
6517 usually involves creating some relocations or building special
6518 symbols to mark the end of the function. */
6519
6520 static void
6521 process_exit (void)
6522 {
6523 char *where;
6524
6525 where = frag_more (0);
6526
6527 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
6528 /* Mark the end of the function, stuff away the location of the frag
6529 for the end of the function, and finally call pa_build_unwind_subspace
6530 to add an entry in the unwind table. */
6531 (void) where;
6532 hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function ();
6533 pa_build_unwind_subspace (last_call_info);
6534 #else
6535 /* SOM defers building of unwind descriptors until the link phase.
6536 The assembler is responsible for creating an R_ENTRY relocation
6537 to mark the beginning of a region and hold the unwind bits, and
6538 for creating an R_EXIT relocation to mark the end of the region.
6539
6540 FIXME. ELF should be using the same conventions! The problem
6541 is an unwind requires too much relocation space. Hmmm. Maybe
6542 if we split the unwind bits up between the relocations which
6543 denote the entry and exit points. */
6544 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
6545 NULL, (offsetT) 0,
6546 NULL, 0, R_HPPA_EXIT, e_fsel, 0, 0,
6547 UNWIND_HIGH32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor));
6548 #endif
6549 }
6550
6551 /* Process a .EXIT pseudo-op. */
6552
6553 static void
6554 pa_exit (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6555 {
6556 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6557 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6558 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6559 #endif
6560
6561 if (!within_procedure)
6562 as_bad (_(".EXIT must appear within a procedure"));
6563 else
6564 {
6565 if (!callinfo_found)
6566 as_bad (_("Missing .callinfo"));
6567 else
6568 {
6569 if (!within_entry_exit)
6570 as_bad (_("No .ENTRY for this .EXIT"));
6571 else
6572 {
6573 within_entry_exit = FALSE;
6574 process_exit ();
6575 }
6576 }
6577 }
6578 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6579 }
6580
6581 /* Helper function to process arguments to a .EXPORT pseudo-op. */
6582
6583 static void
6584 pa_type_args (symbolS *symbolP, int is_export)
6585 {
6586 char *name, c, *p;
6587 unsigned int temp, arg_reloc;
6588 pa_symbol_type type = SYMBOL_TYPE_UNKNOWN;
6589 asymbol *bfdsym = symbol_get_bfdsym (symbolP);
6590
6591 if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "absolute", 8) == 0)
6592 {
6593 input_line_pointer += 8;
6594 bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6595 S_SET_SEGMENT (symbolP, bfd_abs_section_ptr);
6596 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_ABSOLUTE;
6597 }
6598 else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "code", 4) == 0)
6599 {
6600 input_line_pointer += 4;
6601 /* IMPORTing/EXPORTing CODE types for functions is meaningless for SOM,
6602 instead one should be IMPORTing/EXPORTing ENTRY types.
6603
6604 Complain if one tries to EXPORT a CODE type since that's never
6605 done. Both GCC and HP C still try to IMPORT CODE types, so
6606 silently fix them to be ENTRY types. */
6607 if (S_IS_FUNCTION (symbolP))
6608 {
6609 if (is_export)
6610 as_tsktsk (_("Using ENTRY rather than CODE in export directive for %s"),
6611 S_GET_NAME (symbolP));
6612
6613 bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6614 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_ENTRY;
6615 }
6616 else
6617 {
6618 bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6619 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_CODE;
6620 }
6621 }
6622 else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "data", 4) == 0)
6623 {
6624 input_line_pointer += 4;
6625 bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6626 bfdsym->flags |= BSF_OBJECT;
6627 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_DATA;
6628 }
6629 else if ((strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "entry", 5) == 0))
6630 {
6631 input_line_pointer += 5;
6632 bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6633 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_ENTRY;
6634 }
6635 else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "millicode", 9) == 0)
6636 {
6637 input_line_pointer += 9;
6638 bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6639 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
6640 {
6641 elf_symbol_type *elfsym = (elf_symbol_type *) bfdsym;
6642 elfsym->internal_elf_sym.st_info =
6643 ELF_ST_INFO (ELF_ST_BIND (elfsym->internal_elf_sym.st_info),
6644 STT_PARISC_MILLI);
6645 }
6646 #endif
6647 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_MILLICODE;
6648 }
6649 else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "plabel", 6) == 0)
6650 {
6651 input_line_pointer += 6;
6652 bfdsym->flags &= ~BSF_FUNCTION;
6653 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_PLABEL;
6654 }
6655 else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "pri_prog", 8) == 0)
6656 {
6657 input_line_pointer += 8;
6658 bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6659 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_PRI_PROG;
6660 }
6661 else if (strncasecmp (input_line_pointer, "sec_prog", 8) == 0)
6662 {
6663 input_line_pointer += 8;
6664 bfdsym->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6665 type = SYMBOL_TYPE_SEC_PROG;
6666 }
6667
6668 /* SOM requires much more information about symbol types
6669 than BFD understands. This is how we get this information
6670 to the SOM BFD backend. */
6671 #ifdef obj_set_symbol_type
6672 obj_set_symbol_type (bfdsym, (int) type);
6673 #else
6674 (void) type;
6675 #endif
6676
6677 /* Now that the type of the exported symbol has been handled,
6678 handle any argument relocation information. */
6679 while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6680 {
6681 if (*input_line_pointer == ',')
6682 input_line_pointer++;
6683 name = input_line_pointer;
6684 c = get_symbol_end ();
6685 /* Argument sources. */
6686 if ((strncasecmp (name, "argw", 4) == 0))
6687 {
6688 p = input_line_pointer;
6689 *p = c;
6690 input_line_pointer++;
6691 temp = atoi (name + 4);
6692 name = input_line_pointer;
6693 c = get_symbol_end ();
6694 arg_reloc = pa_align_arg_reloc (temp, pa_build_arg_reloc (name));
6695 #if defined (OBJ_SOM) || defined (ELF_ARG_RELOC)
6696 symbol_arg_reloc_info (symbolP) |= arg_reloc;
6697 #else
6698 (void) arg_reloc;
6699 #endif
6700 *input_line_pointer = c;
6701 }
6702 /* The return value. */
6703 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "rtnval", 6)) == 0)
6704 {
6705 p = input_line_pointer;
6706 *p = c;
6707 input_line_pointer++;
6708 name = input_line_pointer;
6709 c = get_symbol_end ();
6710 arg_reloc = pa_build_arg_reloc (name);
6711 #if defined (OBJ_SOM) || defined (ELF_ARG_RELOC)
6712 symbol_arg_reloc_info (symbolP) |= arg_reloc;
6713 #else
6714 (void) arg_reloc;
6715 #endif
6716 *input_line_pointer = c;
6717 }
6718 /* Privilege level. */
6719 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "priv_lev", 8)) == 0)
6720 {
6721 p = input_line_pointer;
6722 *p = c;
6723 input_line_pointer++;
6724 temp = atoi (input_line_pointer);
6725 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6726 ((obj_symbol_type *) bfdsym)->tc_data.ap.hppa_priv_level = temp;
6727 #endif
6728 c = get_symbol_end ();
6729 *input_line_pointer = c;
6730 }
6731 else
6732 {
6733 as_bad (_("Undefined .EXPORT/.IMPORT argument (ignored): %s"), name);
6734 p = input_line_pointer;
6735 *p = c;
6736 }
6737 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6738 input_line_pointer++;
6739 }
6740 }
6741
6742 /* Process a .EXPORT directive. This makes functions external
6743 and provides information such as argument relocation entries
6744 to callers. */
6745
6746 static void
6747 pa_export (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6748 {
6749 char *name, c, *p;
6750 symbolS *symbol;
6751
6752 name = input_line_pointer;
6753 c = get_symbol_end ();
6754 /* Make sure the given symbol exists. */
6755 if ((symbol = symbol_find_or_make (name)) == NULL)
6756 {
6757 as_bad (_("Cannot define export symbol: %s\n"), name);
6758 p = input_line_pointer;
6759 *p = c;
6760 input_line_pointer++;
6761 }
6762 else
6763 {
6764 /* OK. Set the external bits and process argument relocations.
6765 For the HP, weak and global are not mutually exclusive.
6766 S_SET_EXTERNAL will not set BSF_GLOBAL if WEAK is set.
6767 Call S_SET_EXTERNAL to get the other processing. Manually
6768 set BSF_GLOBAL when we get back. */
6769 S_SET_EXTERNAL (symbol);
6770 symbol_get_bfdsym (symbol)->flags |= BSF_GLOBAL;
6771 p = input_line_pointer;
6772 *p = c;
6773 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6774 {
6775 input_line_pointer++;
6776 pa_type_args (symbol, 1);
6777 }
6778 }
6779
6780 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6781 }
6782
6783 /* Handle an .IMPORT pseudo-op. Any symbol referenced in a given
6784 assembly file must either be defined in the assembly file, or
6785 explicitly IMPORTED from another. */
6786
6787 static void
6788 pa_import (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6789 {
6790 char *name, c, *p;
6791 symbolS *symbol;
6792
6793 name = input_line_pointer;
6794 c = get_symbol_end ();
6795
6796 symbol = symbol_find (name);
6797 /* Ugh. We might be importing a symbol defined earlier in the file,
6798 in which case all the code below will really screw things up
6799 (set the wrong segment, symbol flags & type, etc). */
6800 if (symbol == NULL || !S_IS_DEFINED (symbol))
6801 {
6802 symbol = symbol_find_or_make (name);
6803 p = input_line_pointer;
6804 *p = c;
6805
6806 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6807 {
6808 input_line_pointer++;
6809 pa_type_args (symbol, 0);
6810 }
6811 else
6812 {
6813 /* Sigh. To be compatible with the HP assembler and to help
6814 poorly written assembly code, we assign a type based on
6815 the current segment. Note only BSF_FUNCTION really
6816 matters, we do not need to set the full SYMBOL_TYPE_* info. */
6817 if (now_seg == text_section)
6818 symbol_get_bfdsym (symbol)->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
6819
6820 /* If the section is undefined, then the symbol is undefined
6821 Since this is an import, leave the section undefined. */
6822 S_SET_SEGMENT (symbol, bfd_und_section_ptr);
6823 }
6824 }
6825 else
6826 {
6827 /* The symbol was already defined. Just eat everything up to
6828 the end of the current statement. */
6829 while (!is_end_of_statement ())
6830 input_line_pointer++;
6831 }
6832
6833 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6834 }
6835
6836 /* Handle a .LABEL pseudo-op. */
6837
6838 static void
6839 pa_label (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6840 {
6841 char *name, c, *p;
6842
6843 name = input_line_pointer;
6844 c = get_symbol_end ();
6845
6846 if (strlen (name) > 0)
6847 {
6848 colon (name);
6849 p = input_line_pointer;
6850 *p = c;
6851 }
6852 else
6853 {
6854 as_warn (_("Missing label name on .LABEL"));
6855 }
6856
6857 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6858 {
6859 as_warn (_("extra .LABEL arguments ignored."));
6860 ignore_rest_of_line ();
6861 }
6862 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6863 }
6864
6865 /* Handle a .LEAVE pseudo-op. This is not supported yet. */
6866
6867 static void
6868 pa_leave (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6869 {
6870 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6871 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6872 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6873 #endif
6874
6875 as_bad (_("The .LEAVE pseudo-op is not supported"));
6876 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6877 }
6878
6879 /* Handle a .LEVEL pseudo-op. */
6880
6881 static void
6882 pa_level (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6883 {
6884 char *level;
6885
6886 level = input_line_pointer;
6887 if (strncmp (level, "1.0", 3) == 0)
6888 {
6889 input_line_pointer += 3;
6890 if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 10))
6891 as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6892 }
6893 else if (strncmp (level, "1.1", 3) == 0)
6894 {
6895 input_line_pointer += 3;
6896 if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 11))
6897 as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6898 }
6899 else if (strncmp (level, "2.0w", 4) == 0)
6900 {
6901 input_line_pointer += 4;
6902 if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 25))
6903 as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6904 }
6905 else if (strncmp (level, "2.0", 3) == 0)
6906 {
6907 input_line_pointer += 3;
6908 if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, 20))
6909 as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
6910 }
6911 else
6912 {
6913 as_bad (_("Unrecognized .LEVEL argument\n"));
6914 ignore_rest_of_line ();
6915 }
6916 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6917 }
6918
6919 /* Handle a .ORIGIN pseudo-op. */
6920
6921 static void
6922 pa_origin (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6923 {
6924 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6925 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6926 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6927 #endif
6928
6929 s_org (0);
6930 pa_undefine_label ();
6931 }
6932
6933 /* Handle a .PARAM pseudo-op. This is much like a .EXPORT, except it
6934 is for static functions. FIXME. Should share more code with .EXPORT. */
6935
6936 static void
6937 pa_param (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6938 {
6939 char *name, c, *p;
6940 symbolS *symbol;
6941
6942 name = input_line_pointer;
6943 c = get_symbol_end ();
6944
6945 if ((symbol = symbol_find_or_make (name)) == NULL)
6946 {
6947 as_bad (_("Cannot define static symbol: %s\n"), name);
6948 p = input_line_pointer;
6949 *p = c;
6950 input_line_pointer++;
6951 }
6952 else
6953 {
6954 S_CLEAR_EXTERNAL (symbol);
6955 p = input_line_pointer;
6956 *p = c;
6957 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
6958 {
6959 input_line_pointer++;
6960 pa_type_args (symbol, 0);
6961 }
6962 }
6963
6964 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
6965 }
6966
6967 /* Handle a .PROC pseudo-op. It is used to mark the beginning
6968 of a procedure from a syntactical point of view. */
6969
6970 static void
6971 pa_proc (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
6972 {
6973 struct call_info *call_info;
6974
6975 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
6976 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
6977 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
6978 #endif
6979
6980 if (within_procedure)
6981 as_fatal (_("Nested procedures"));
6982
6983 /* Reset global variables for new procedure. */
6984 callinfo_found = FALSE;
6985 within_procedure = TRUE;
6986
6987 /* Create another call_info structure. */
6988 call_info = xmalloc (sizeof (struct call_info));
6989
6990 if (!call_info)
6991 as_fatal (_("Cannot allocate unwind descriptor\n"));
6992
6993 memset (call_info, 0, sizeof (struct call_info));
6994
6995 call_info->ci_next = NULL;
6996
6997 if (call_info_root == NULL)
6998 {
6999 call_info_root = call_info;
7000 last_call_info = call_info;
7001 }
7002 else
7003 {
7004 last_call_info->ci_next = call_info;
7005 last_call_info = call_info;
7006 }
7007
7008 /* set up defaults on call_info structure */
7009
7010 call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.cannot_unwind = 0;
7011 call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.region_desc = 1;
7012 call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor.hpux_interrupt_marker = 0;
7013
7014 /* If we got a .PROC pseudo-op, we know that the function is defined
7015 locally. Make sure it gets into the symbol table. */
7016 {
7017 label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
7018
7019 if (label_symbol)
7020 {
7021 if (label_symbol->lss_label)
7022 {
7023 last_call_info->start_symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
7024 symbol_get_bfdsym (label_symbol->lss_label)->flags |= BSF_FUNCTION;
7025 }
7026 else
7027 as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC (corrupted label chain)"));
7028 }
7029 else
7030 last_call_info->start_symbol = NULL;
7031 }
7032
7033 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7034 }
7035
7036 /* Process the syntactical end of a procedure. Make sure all the
7037 appropriate pseudo-ops were found within the procedure. */
7038
7039 static void
7040 pa_procend (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
7041 {
7042 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
7043 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
7044 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
7045 #endif
7046
7047 /* If we are within a procedure definition, make sure we've
7048 defined a label for the procedure; handle case where the
7049 label was defined after the .PROC directive.
7050
7051 Note there's not need to diddle with the segment or fragment
7052 for the label symbol in this case. We have already switched
7053 into the new $CODE$ subspace at this point. */
7054 if (within_procedure && last_call_info->start_symbol == NULL)
7055 {
7056 label_symbol_struct *label_symbol = pa_get_label ();
7057
7058 if (label_symbol)
7059 {
7060 if (label_symbol->lss_label)
7061 {
7062 last_call_info->start_symbol = label_symbol->lss_label;
7063 symbol_get_bfdsym (label_symbol->lss_label)->flags
7064 |= BSF_FUNCTION;
7065 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
7066 /* Also handle allocation of a fixup to hold the unwind
7067 information when the label appears after the proc/procend. */
7068 if (within_entry_exit)
7069 {
7070 char *where;
7071 unsigned int u;
7072
7073 where = frag_more (0);
7074 u = UNWIND_LOW32 (&last_call_info->ci_unwind.descriptor);
7075 fix_new_hppa (frag_now, where - frag_now->fr_literal, 0,
7076 NULL, (offsetT) 0, NULL,
7077 0, R_HPPA_ENTRY, e_fsel, 0, 0, u);
7078 }
7079 #endif
7080 }
7081 else
7082 as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC (corrupted label chain)"));
7083 }
7084 else
7085 as_bad (_("Missing function name for .PROC"));
7086 }
7087
7088 if (!within_procedure)
7089 as_bad (_("misplaced .procend"));
7090
7091 if (!callinfo_found)
7092 as_bad (_("Missing .callinfo for this procedure"));
7093
7094 if (within_entry_exit)
7095 as_bad (_("Missing .EXIT for a .ENTRY"));
7096
7097 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
7098 /* ELF needs to mark the end of each function so that it can compute
7099 the size of the function (apparently its needed in the symbol table). */
7100 hppa_elf_mark_end_of_function ();
7101 #endif
7102
7103 within_procedure = FALSE;
7104 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7105 pa_undefine_label ();
7106 }
7107
7108 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
7109 /* If VALUE is an exact power of two between zero and 2^31, then
7110 return log2 (VALUE). Else return -1. */
7111
7112 static int
7113 exact_log2 (int value)
7114 {
7115 int shift = 0;
7116
7117 while ((1 << shift) != value && shift < 32)
7118 shift++;
7119
7120 if (shift >= 32)
7121 return -1;
7122 else
7123 return shift;
7124 }
7125
7126 /* Check to make sure we have a valid space and subspace. */
7127
7128 static void
7129 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace (void)
7130 {
7131 if (current_space == NULL)
7132 as_fatal (_("Not in a space.\n"));
7133
7134 if (current_subspace == NULL)
7135 as_fatal (_("Not in a subspace.\n"));
7136 }
7137
7138 /* Parse the parameters to a .SPACE directive; if CREATE_FLAG is nonzero,
7139 then create a new space entry to hold the information specified
7140 by the parameters to the .SPACE directive. */
7141
7142 static sd_chain_struct *
7143 pa_parse_space_stmt (char *space_name, int create_flag)
7144 {
7145 char *name, *ptemp, c;
7146 char loadable, defined, private, sort;
7147 int spnum;
7148 asection *seg = NULL;
7149 sd_chain_struct *space;
7150
7151 /* Load default values. */
7152 spnum = 0;
7153 sort = 0;
7154 loadable = TRUE;
7155 defined = TRUE;
7156 private = FALSE;
7157 if (strcmp (space_name, "$TEXT$") == 0)
7158 {
7159 seg = pa_def_spaces[0].segment;
7160 defined = pa_def_spaces[0].defined;
7161 private = pa_def_spaces[0].private;
7162 sort = pa_def_spaces[0].sort;
7163 spnum = pa_def_spaces[0].spnum;
7164 }
7165 else if (strcmp (space_name, "$PRIVATE$") == 0)
7166 {
7167 seg = pa_def_spaces[1].segment;
7168 defined = pa_def_spaces[1].defined;
7169 private = pa_def_spaces[1].private;
7170 sort = pa_def_spaces[1].sort;
7171 spnum = pa_def_spaces[1].spnum;
7172 }
7173
7174 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7175 {
7176 print_errors = FALSE;
7177 ptemp = input_line_pointer + 1;
7178 /* First see if the space was specified as a number rather than
7179 as a name. According to the PA assembly manual the rest of
7180 the line should be ignored. */
7181 strict = 0;
7182 pa_parse_number (&ptemp, 0);
7183 if (pa_number >= 0)
7184 {
7185 spnum = pa_number;
7186 input_line_pointer = ptemp;
7187 }
7188 else
7189 {
7190 while (!is_end_of_statement ())
7191 {
7192 input_line_pointer++;
7193 name = input_line_pointer;
7194 c = get_symbol_end ();
7195 if ((strncasecmp (name, "spnum", 5) == 0))
7196 {
7197 *input_line_pointer = c;
7198 input_line_pointer++;
7199 spnum = get_absolute_expression ();
7200 }
7201 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "sort", 4) == 0))
7202 {
7203 *input_line_pointer = c;
7204 input_line_pointer++;
7205 sort = get_absolute_expression ();
7206 }
7207 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "unloadable", 10) == 0))
7208 {
7209 *input_line_pointer = c;
7210 loadable = FALSE;
7211 }
7212 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "notdefined", 10) == 0))
7213 {
7214 *input_line_pointer = c;
7215 defined = FALSE;
7216 }
7217 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "private", 7) == 0))
7218 {
7219 *input_line_pointer = c;
7220 private = TRUE;
7221 }
7222 else
7223 {
7224 as_bad (_("Invalid .SPACE argument"));
7225 *input_line_pointer = c;
7226 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7227 input_line_pointer++;
7228 }
7229 }
7230 }
7231 print_errors = TRUE;
7232 }
7233
7234 if (create_flag && seg == NULL)
7235 seg = subseg_new (space_name, 0);
7236
7237 /* If create_flag is nonzero, then create the new space with
7238 the attributes computed above. Else set the values in
7239 an already existing space -- this can only happen for
7240 the first occurrence of a built-in space. */
7241 if (create_flag)
7242 space = create_new_space (space_name, spnum, loadable, defined,
7243 private, sort, seg, 1);
7244 else
7245 {
7246 space = is_defined_space (space_name);
7247 SPACE_SPNUM (space) = spnum;
7248 SPACE_DEFINED (space) = defined & 1;
7249 SPACE_USER_DEFINED (space) = 1;
7250 }
7251
7252 #ifdef obj_set_section_attributes
7253 obj_set_section_attributes (seg, defined, private, sort, spnum);
7254 #endif
7255
7256 return space;
7257 }
7258
7259 /* Handle a .SPACE pseudo-op; this switches the current space to the
7260 given space, creating the new space if necessary. */
7261
7262 static void
7263 pa_space (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
7264 {
7265 char *name, c, *space_name, *save_s;
7266 sd_chain_struct *sd_chain;
7267
7268 if (within_procedure)
7269 {
7270 as_bad (_("Can\'t change spaces within a procedure definition. Ignored"));
7271 ignore_rest_of_line ();
7272 }
7273 else
7274 {
7275 /* Check for some of the predefined spaces. FIXME: most of the code
7276 below is repeated several times, can we extract the common parts
7277 and place them into a subroutine or something similar? */
7278 /* FIXME Is this (and the next IF stmt) really right?
7279 What if INPUT_LINE_POINTER points to "$TEXT$FOO"? */
7280 if (strncmp (input_line_pointer, "$TEXT$", 6) == 0)
7281 {
7282 input_line_pointer += 6;
7283 sd_chain = is_defined_space ("$TEXT$");
7284 if (sd_chain == NULL)
7285 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$TEXT$", 1);
7286 else if (SPACE_USER_DEFINED (sd_chain) == 0)
7287 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$TEXT$", 0);
7288
7289 current_space = sd_chain;
7290 subseg_set (text_section, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7291 current_subspace
7292 = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (text_section,
7293 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7294 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7295 return;
7296 }
7297 if (strncmp (input_line_pointer, "$PRIVATE$", 9) == 0)
7298 {
7299 input_line_pointer += 9;
7300 sd_chain = is_defined_space ("$PRIVATE$");
7301 if (sd_chain == NULL)
7302 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$PRIVATE$", 1);
7303 else if (SPACE_USER_DEFINED (sd_chain) == 0)
7304 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt ("$PRIVATE$", 0);
7305
7306 current_space = sd_chain;
7307 subseg_set (data_section, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7308 current_subspace
7309 = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (data_section,
7310 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7311 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7312 return;
7313 }
7314 if (!strncasecmp (input_line_pointer,
7315 GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME,
7316 strlen (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME)))
7317 {
7318 input_line_pointer += strlen (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME);
7319 sd_chain = is_defined_space (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME);
7320 if (sd_chain == NULL)
7321 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME, 1);
7322 else if (SPACE_USER_DEFINED (sd_chain) == 0)
7323 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt (GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME, 0);
7324
7325 current_space = sd_chain;
7326
7327 {
7328 asection *gdb_section
7329 = bfd_make_section_old_way (stdoutput, GDB_DEBUG_SPACE_NAME);
7330
7331 subseg_set (gdb_section, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7332 current_subspace
7333 = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (gdb_section,
7334 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7335 }
7336 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7337 return;
7338 }
7339
7340 /* It could be a space specified by number. */
7341 print_errors = 0;
7342 save_s = input_line_pointer;
7343 strict = 0;
7344 pa_parse_number (&input_line_pointer, 0);
7345 if (pa_number >= 0)
7346 {
7347 if ((sd_chain = pa_find_space_by_number (pa_number)))
7348 {
7349 current_space = sd_chain;
7350
7351 subseg_set (sd_chain->sd_seg, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7352 current_subspace
7353 = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (sd_chain->sd_seg,
7354 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7355 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7356 return;
7357 }
7358 }
7359
7360 /* Not a number, attempt to create a new space. */
7361 print_errors = 1;
7362 input_line_pointer = save_s;
7363 name = input_line_pointer;
7364 c = get_symbol_end ();
7365 space_name = xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7366 strcpy (space_name, name);
7367 *input_line_pointer = c;
7368
7369 sd_chain = pa_parse_space_stmt (space_name, 1);
7370 current_space = sd_chain;
7371
7372 subseg_set (sd_chain->sd_seg, sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7373 current_subspace = pa_subsegment_to_subspace (sd_chain->sd_seg,
7374 sd_chain->sd_last_subseg);
7375 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7376 }
7377 }
7378
7379 /* Switch to a new space. (I think). FIXME. */
7380
7381 static void
7382 pa_spnum (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
7383 {
7384 char *name;
7385 char c;
7386 char *p;
7387 sd_chain_struct *space;
7388
7389 name = input_line_pointer;
7390 c = get_symbol_end ();
7391 space = is_defined_space (name);
7392 if (space)
7393 {
7394 p = frag_more (4);
7395 md_number_to_chars (p, SPACE_SPNUM (space), 4);
7396 }
7397 else
7398 as_warn (_("Undefined space: '%s' Assuming space number = 0."), name);
7399
7400 *input_line_pointer = c;
7401 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7402 }
7403
7404 /* Handle a .SUBSPACE pseudo-op; this switches the current subspace to the
7405 given subspace, creating the new subspace if necessary.
7406
7407 FIXME. Should mirror pa_space more closely, in particular how
7408 they're broken up into subroutines. */
7409
7410 static void
7411 pa_subspace (int create_new)
7412 {
7413 char *name, *ss_name, c;
7414 char loadable, code_only, comdat, common, dup_common, zero, sort;
7415 int i, access_ctr, space_index, alignment, quadrant, applicable, flags;
7416 sd_chain_struct *space;
7417 ssd_chain_struct *ssd;
7418 asection *section;
7419
7420 if (current_space == NULL)
7421 as_fatal (_("Must be in a space before changing or declaring subspaces.\n"));
7422
7423 if (within_procedure)
7424 {
7425 as_bad (_("Can\'t change subspaces within a procedure definition. Ignored"));
7426 ignore_rest_of_line ();
7427 }
7428 else
7429 {
7430 name = input_line_pointer;
7431 c = get_symbol_end ();
7432 ss_name = xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7433 strcpy (ss_name, name);
7434 *input_line_pointer = c;
7435
7436 /* Load default values. */
7437 sort = 0;
7438 access_ctr = 0x7f;
7439 loadable = 1;
7440 comdat = 0;
7441 common = 0;
7442 dup_common = 0;
7443 code_only = 0;
7444 zero = 0;
7445 space_index = ~0;
7446 alignment = 1;
7447 quadrant = 0;
7448
7449 space = current_space;
7450 if (create_new)
7451 ssd = NULL;
7452 else
7453 ssd = is_defined_subspace (ss_name);
7454 /* Allow user to override the builtin attributes of subspaces. But
7455 only allow the attributes to be changed once! */
7456 if (ssd && SUBSPACE_DEFINED (ssd))
7457 {
7458 subseg_set (ssd->ssd_seg, ssd->ssd_subseg);
7459 current_subspace = ssd;
7460 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7461 as_warn (_("Parameters of an existing subspace can\'t be modified"));
7462 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7463 return;
7464 }
7465 else
7466 {
7467 /* A new subspace. Load default values if it matches one of
7468 the builtin subspaces. */
7469 i = 0;
7470 while (pa_def_subspaces[i].name)
7471 {
7472 if (strcasecmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, ss_name) == 0)
7473 {
7474 loadable = pa_def_subspaces[i].loadable;
7475 comdat = pa_def_subspaces[i].comdat;
7476 common = pa_def_subspaces[i].common;
7477 dup_common = pa_def_subspaces[i].dup_common;
7478 code_only = pa_def_subspaces[i].code_only;
7479 zero = pa_def_subspaces[i].zero;
7480 space_index = pa_def_subspaces[i].space_index;
7481 alignment = pa_def_subspaces[i].alignment;
7482 quadrant = pa_def_subspaces[i].quadrant;
7483 access_ctr = pa_def_subspaces[i].access;
7484 sort = pa_def_subspaces[i].sort;
7485 break;
7486 }
7487 i++;
7488 }
7489 }
7490
7491 /* We should be working with a new subspace now. Fill in
7492 any information as specified by the user. */
7493 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7494 {
7495 input_line_pointer++;
7496 while (!is_end_of_statement ())
7497 {
7498 name = input_line_pointer;
7499 c = get_symbol_end ();
7500 if ((strncasecmp (name, "quad", 4) == 0))
7501 {
7502 *input_line_pointer = c;
7503 input_line_pointer++;
7504 quadrant = get_absolute_expression ();
7505 }
7506 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "align", 5) == 0))
7507 {
7508 *input_line_pointer = c;
7509 input_line_pointer++;
7510 alignment = get_absolute_expression ();
7511 if (exact_log2 (alignment) == -1)
7512 {
7513 as_bad (_("Alignment must be a power of 2"));
7514 alignment = 1;
7515 }
7516 }
7517 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "access", 6) == 0))
7518 {
7519 *input_line_pointer = c;
7520 input_line_pointer++;
7521 access_ctr = get_absolute_expression ();
7522 }
7523 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "sort", 4) == 0))
7524 {
7525 *input_line_pointer = c;
7526 input_line_pointer++;
7527 sort = get_absolute_expression ();
7528 }
7529 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "code_only", 9) == 0))
7530 {
7531 *input_line_pointer = c;
7532 code_only = 1;
7533 }
7534 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "unloadable", 10) == 0))
7535 {
7536 *input_line_pointer = c;
7537 loadable = 0;
7538 }
7539 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "comdat", 6) == 0))
7540 {
7541 *input_line_pointer = c;
7542 comdat = 1;
7543 }
7544 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "common", 6) == 0))
7545 {
7546 *input_line_pointer = c;
7547 common = 1;
7548 }
7549 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "dup_comm", 8) == 0))
7550 {
7551 *input_line_pointer = c;
7552 dup_common = 1;
7553 }
7554 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "zero", 4) == 0))
7555 {
7556 *input_line_pointer = c;
7557 zero = 1;
7558 }
7559 else if ((strncasecmp (name, "first", 5) == 0))
7560 as_bad (_("FIRST not supported as a .SUBSPACE argument"));
7561 else
7562 as_bad (_("Invalid .SUBSPACE argument"));
7563 if (!is_end_of_statement ())
7564 input_line_pointer++;
7565 }
7566 }
7567
7568 /* Compute a reasonable set of BFD flags based on the information
7569 in the .subspace directive. */
7570 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7571 flags = 0;
7572 if (loadable)
7573 flags |= (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD);
7574 if (code_only)
7575 flags |= SEC_CODE;
7576
7577 /* These flags are used to implement various flavors of initialized
7578 common. The SOM linker discards duplicate subspaces when they
7579 have the same "key" symbol name. This support is more like
7580 GNU linkonce than BFD common. Further, pc-relative relocations
7581 are converted to section relative relocations in BFD common
7582 sections. This complicates the handling of relocations in
7583 common sections containing text and isn't currently supported
7584 correctly in the SOM BFD backend. */
7585 if (comdat || common || dup_common)
7586 flags |= SEC_LINK_ONCE;
7587
7588 flags |= SEC_RELOC | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS;
7589
7590 /* This is a zero-filled subspace (eg BSS). */
7591 if (zero)
7592 flags &= ~(SEC_LOAD | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS);
7593
7594 applicable &= flags;
7595
7596 /* If this is an existing subspace, then we want to use the
7597 segment already associated with the subspace.
7598
7599 FIXME NOW! ELF BFD doesn't appear to be ready to deal with
7600 lots of sections. It might be a problem in the PA ELF
7601 code, I do not know yet. For now avoid creating anything
7602 but the "standard" sections for ELF. */
7603 if (create_new)
7604 section = subseg_force_new (ss_name, 0);
7605 else if (ssd)
7606 section = ssd->ssd_seg;
7607 else
7608 section = subseg_new (ss_name, 0);
7609
7610 if (zero)
7611 seg_info (section)->bss = 1;
7612
7613 /* Now set the flags. */
7614 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, section, applicable);
7615
7616 /* Record any alignment request for this section. */
7617 record_alignment (section, exact_log2 (alignment));
7618
7619 /* Set the starting offset for this section. */
7620 bfd_set_section_vma (stdoutput, section,
7621 pa_subspace_start (space, quadrant));
7622
7623 /* Now that all the flags are set, update an existing subspace,
7624 or create a new one. */
7625 if (ssd)
7626
7627 current_subspace = update_subspace (space, ss_name, loadable,
7628 code_only, comdat, common,
7629 dup_common, sort, zero, access_ctr,
7630 space_index, alignment, quadrant,
7631 section);
7632 else
7633 current_subspace = create_new_subspace (space, ss_name, loadable,
7634 code_only, comdat, common,
7635 dup_common, zero, sort,
7636 access_ctr, space_index,
7637 alignment, quadrant, section);
7638
7639 demand_empty_rest_of_line ();
7640 current_subspace->ssd_seg = section;
7641 subseg_set (current_subspace->ssd_seg, current_subspace->ssd_subseg);
7642 }
7643 SUBSPACE_DEFINED (current_subspace) = 1;
7644 }
7645
7646 /* Create default space and subspace dictionaries. */
7647
7648 static void
7649 pa_spaces_begin (void)
7650 {
7651 int i;
7652
7653 space_dict_root = NULL;
7654 space_dict_last = NULL;
7655
7656 i = 0;
7657 while (pa_def_spaces[i].name)
7658 {
7659 char *name;
7660
7661 /* Pick the right name to use for the new section. */
7662 name = pa_def_spaces[i].name;
7663
7664 pa_def_spaces[i].segment = subseg_new (name, 0);
7665 create_new_space (pa_def_spaces[i].name, pa_def_spaces[i].spnum,
7666 pa_def_spaces[i].loadable, pa_def_spaces[i].defined,
7667 pa_def_spaces[i].private, pa_def_spaces[i].sort,
7668 pa_def_spaces[i].segment, 0);
7669 i++;
7670 }
7671
7672 i = 0;
7673 while (pa_def_subspaces[i].name)
7674 {
7675 char *name;
7676 int applicable, subsegment;
7677 asection *segment = NULL;
7678 sd_chain_struct *space;
7679
7680 /* Pick the right name for the new section and pick the right
7681 subsegment number. */
7682 name = pa_def_subspaces[i].name;
7683 subsegment = 0;
7684
7685 /* Create the new section. */
7686 segment = subseg_new (name, subsegment);
7687
7688 /* For SOM we want to replace the standard .text, .data, and .bss
7689 sections with our own. We also want to set BFD flags for
7690 all the built-in subspaces. */
7691 if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$CODE$"))
7692 {
7693 text_section = segment;
7694 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7695 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7696 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7697 | SEC_RELOC | SEC_CODE
7698 | SEC_READONLY
7699 | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7700 }
7701 else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$DATA$"))
7702 {
7703 data_section = segment;
7704 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7705 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7706 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7707 | SEC_RELOC
7708 | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7709
7710 }
7711 else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$BSS$"))
7712 {
7713 bss_section = segment;
7714 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7715 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7716 applicable & SEC_ALLOC);
7717 }
7718 else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$LIT$"))
7719 {
7720 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7721 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7722 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7723 | SEC_RELOC
7724 | SEC_READONLY
7725 | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7726 }
7727 else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$MILLICODE$"))
7728 {
7729 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7730 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7731 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7732 | SEC_RELOC
7733 | SEC_READONLY
7734 | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7735 }
7736 else if (!strcmp (pa_def_subspaces[i].name, "$UNWIND$"))
7737 {
7738 applicable = bfd_applicable_section_flags (stdoutput);
7739 bfd_set_section_flags (stdoutput, segment,
7740 applicable & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD
7741 | SEC_RELOC
7742 | SEC_READONLY
7743 | SEC_HAS_CONTENTS));
7744 }
7745
7746 /* Find the space associated with this subspace. */
7747 space = pa_segment_to_space (pa_def_spaces[pa_def_subspaces[i].
7748 def_space_index].segment);
7749 if (space == NULL)
7750 {
7751 as_fatal (_("Internal error: Unable to find containing space for %s."),
7752 pa_def_subspaces[i].name);
7753 }
7754
7755 create_new_subspace (space, name,
7756 pa_def_subspaces[i].loadable,
7757 pa_def_subspaces[i].code_only,
7758 pa_def_subspaces[i].comdat,
7759 pa_def_subspaces[i].common,
7760 pa_def_subspaces[i].dup_common,
7761 pa_def_subspaces[i].zero,
7762 pa_def_subspaces[i].sort,
7763 pa_def_subspaces[i].access,
7764 pa_def_subspaces[i].space_index,
7765 pa_def_subspaces[i].alignment,
7766 pa_def_subspaces[i].quadrant,
7767 segment);
7768 i++;
7769 }
7770 }
7771
7772 /* Create a new space NAME, with the appropriate flags as defined
7773 by the given parameters. */
7774
7775 static sd_chain_struct *
7776 create_new_space (char *name,
7777 int spnum,
7778 int loadable ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7779 int defined,
7780 int private,
7781 int sort,
7782 asection *seg,
7783 int user_defined)
7784 {
7785 sd_chain_struct *chain_entry;
7786
7787 chain_entry = xmalloc (sizeof (sd_chain_struct));
7788 if (!chain_entry)
7789 as_fatal (_("Out of memory: could not allocate new space chain entry: %s\n"),
7790 name);
7791
7792 SPACE_NAME (chain_entry) = xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7793 strcpy (SPACE_NAME (chain_entry), name);
7794 SPACE_DEFINED (chain_entry) = defined;
7795 SPACE_USER_DEFINED (chain_entry) = user_defined;
7796 SPACE_SPNUM (chain_entry) = spnum;
7797
7798 chain_entry->sd_seg = seg;
7799 chain_entry->sd_last_subseg = -1;
7800 chain_entry->sd_subspaces = NULL;
7801 chain_entry->sd_next = NULL;
7802
7803 /* Find spot for the new space based on its sort key. */
7804 if (!space_dict_last)
7805 space_dict_last = chain_entry;
7806
7807 if (space_dict_root == NULL)
7808 space_dict_root = chain_entry;
7809 else
7810 {
7811 sd_chain_struct *chain_pointer;
7812 sd_chain_struct *prev_chain_pointer;
7813
7814 chain_pointer = space_dict_root;
7815 prev_chain_pointer = NULL;
7816
7817 while (chain_pointer)
7818 {
7819 prev_chain_pointer = chain_pointer;
7820 chain_pointer = chain_pointer->sd_next;
7821 }
7822
7823 /* At this point we've found the correct place to add the new
7824 entry. So add it and update the linked lists as appropriate. */
7825 if (prev_chain_pointer)
7826 {
7827 chain_entry->sd_next = chain_pointer;
7828 prev_chain_pointer->sd_next = chain_entry;
7829 }
7830 else
7831 {
7832 space_dict_root = chain_entry;
7833 chain_entry->sd_next = chain_pointer;
7834 }
7835
7836 if (chain_entry->sd_next == NULL)
7837 space_dict_last = chain_entry;
7838 }
7839
7840 /* This is here to catch predefined spaces which do not get
7841 modified by the user's input. Another call is found at
7842 the bottom of pa_parse_space_stmt to handle cases where
7843 the user modifies a predefined space. */
7844 #ifdef obj_set_section_attributes
7845 obj_set_section_attributes (seg, defined, private, sort, spnum);
7846 #endif
7847
7848 return chain_entry;
7849 }
7850
7851 /* Create a new subspace NAME, with the appropriate flags as defined
7852 by the given parameters.
7853
7854 Add the new subspace to the subspace dictionary chain in numerical
7855 order as defined by the SORT entries. */
7856
7857 static ssd_chain_struct *
7858 create_new_subspace (sd_chain_struct *space,
7859 char *name,
7860 int loadable ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7861 int code_only ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7862 int comdat,
7863 int common,
7864 int dup_common,
7865 int is_zero ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7866 int sort,
7867 int access_ctr,
7868 int space_index ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7869 int alignment ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7870 int quadrant,
7871 asection *seg)
7872 {
7873 ssd_chain_struct *chain_entry;
7874
7875 chain_entry = xmalloc (sizeof (ssd_chain_struct));
7876 if (!chain_entry)
7877 as_fatal (_("Out of memory: could not allocate new subspace chain entry: %s\n"), name);
7878
7879 SUBSPACE_NAME (chain_entry) = xmalloc (strlen (name) + 1);
7880 strcpy (SUBSPACE_NAME (chain_entry), name);
7881
7882 /* Initialize subspace_defined. When we hit a .subspace directive
7883 we'll set it to 1 which "locks-in" the subspace attributes. */
7884 SUBSPACE_DEFINED (chain_entry) = 0;
7885
7886 chain_entry->ssd_subseg = 0;
7887 chain_entry->ssd_seg = seg;
7888 chain_entry->ssd_next = NULL;
7889
7890 /* Find spot for the new subspace based on its sort key. */
7891 if (space->sd_subspaces == NULL)
7892 space->sd_subspaces = chain_entry;
7893 else
7894 {
7895 ssd_chain_struct *chain_pointer;
7896 ssd_chain_struct *prev_chain_pointer;
7897
7898 chain_pointer = space->sd_subspaces;
7899 prev_chain_pointer = NULL;
7900
7901 while (chain_pointer)
7902 {
7903 prev_chain_pointer = chain_pointer;
7904 chain_pointer = chain_pointer->ssd_next;
7905 }
7906
7907 /* Now we have somewhere to put the new entry. Insert it and update
7908 the links. */
7909 if (prev_chain_pointer)
7910 {
7911 chain_entry->ssd_next = chain_pointer;
7912 prev_chain_pointer->ssd_next = chain_entry;
7913 }
7914 else
7915 {
7916 space->sd_subspaces = chain_entry;
7917 chain_entry->ssd_next = chain_pointer;
7918 }
7919 }
7920
7921 #ifdef obj_set_subsection_attributes
7922 obj_set_subsection_attributes (seg, space->sd_seg, access_ctr, sort,
7923 quadrant, comdat, common, dup_common);
7924 #endif
7925
7926 return chain_entry;
7927 }
7928
7929 /* Update the information for the given subspace based upon the
7930 various arguments. Return the modified subspace chain entry. */
7931
7932 static ssd_chain_struct *
7933 update_subspace (sd_chain_struct *space,
7934 char *name,
7935 int loadable ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7936 int code_only ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7937 int comdat,
7938 int common,
7939 int dup_common,
7940 int sort,
7941 int zero ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7942 int access_ctr,
7943 int space_index ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7944 int alignment ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
7945 int quadrant,
7946 asection *section)
7947 {
7948 ssd_chain_struct *chain_entry;
7949
7950 chain_entry = is_defined_subspace (name);
7951
7952 #ifdef obj_set_subsection_attributes
7953 obj_set_subsection_attributes (section, space->sd_seg, access_ctr, sort,
7954 quadrant, comdat, common, dup_common);
7955 #endif
7956
7957 return chain_entry;
7958 }
7959
7960 /* Return the space chain entry for the space with the name NAME or
7961 NULL if no such space exists. */
7962
7963 static sd_chain_struct *
7964 is_defined_space (char *name)
7965 {
7966 sd_chain_struct *chain_pointer;
7967
7968 for (chain_pointer = space_dict_root;
7969 chain_pointer;
7970 chain_pointer = chain_pointer->sd_next)
7971 if (strcmp (SPACE_NAME (chain_pointer), name) == 0)
7972 return chain_pointer;
7973
7974 /* No mapping from segment to space was found. Return NULL. */
7975 return NULL;
7976 }
7977
7978 /* Find and return the space associated with the given seg. If no mapping
7979 from the given seg to a space is found, then return NULL.
7980
7981 Unlike subspaces, the number of spaces is not expected to grow much,
7982 so a linear exhaustive search is OK here. */
7983
7984 static sd_chain_struct *
7985 pa_segment_to_space (asection *seg)
7986 {
7987 sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
7988
7989 /* Walk through each space looking for the correct mapping. */
7990 for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
7991 space_chain;
7992 space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
7993 if (space_chain->sd_seg == seg)
7994 return space_chain;
7995
7996 /* Mapping was not found. Return NULL. */
7997 return NULL;
7998 }
7999
8000 /* Return the first space chain entry for the subspace with the name
8001 NAME or NULL if no such subspace exists.
8002
8003 When there are multiple subspaces with the same name, switching to
8004 the first (i.e., default) subspace is preferable in most situations.
8005 For example, it wouldn't be desirable to merge COMDAT data with non
8006 COMDAT data.
8007
8008 Uses a linear search through all the spaces and subspaces, this may
8009 not be appropriate if we ever being placing each function in its
8010 own subspace. */
8011
8012 static ssd_chain_struct *
8013 is_defined_subspace (char *name)
8014 {
8015 sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8016 ssd_chain_struct *subspace_chain;
8017
8018 /* Walk through each space. */
8019 for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8020 space_chain;
8021 space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8022 {
8023 /* Walk through each subspace looking for a name which matches. */
8024 for (subspace_chain = space_chain->sd_subspaces;
8025 subspace_chain;
8026 subspace_chain = subspace_chain->ssd_next)
8027 if (strcmp (SUBSPACE_NAME (subspace_chain), name) == 0)
8028 return subspace_chain;
8029 }
8030
8031 /* Subspace wasn't found. Return NULL. */
8032 return NULL;
8033 }
8034
8035 /* Find and return the subspace associated with the given seg. If no
8036 mapping from the given seg to a subspace is found, then return NULL.
8037
8038 If we ever put each procedure/function within its own subspace
8039 (to make life easier on the compiler and linker), then this will have
8040 to become more efficient. */
8041
8042 static ssd_chain_struct *
8043 pa_subsegment_to_subspace (asection *seg, subsegT subseg)
8044 {
8045 sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8046 ssd_chain_struct *subspace_chain;
8047
8048 /* Walk through each space. */
8049 for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8050 space_chain;
8051 space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8052 {
8053 if (space_chain->sd_seg == seg)
8054 {
8055 /* Walk through each subspace within each space looking for
8056 the correct mapping. */
8057 for (subspace_chain = space_chain->sd_subspaces;
8058 subspace_chain;
8059 subspace_chain = subspace_chain->ssd_next)
8060 if (subspace_chain->ssd_subseg == (int) subseg)
8061 return subspace_chain;
8062 }
8063 }
8064
8065 /* No mapping from subsegment to subspace found. Return NULL. */
8066 return NULL;
8067 }
8068
8069 /* Given a number, try and find a space with the name number.
8070
8071 Return a pointer to a space dictionary chain entry for the space
8072 that was found or NULL on failure. */
8073
8074 static sd_chain_struct *
8075 pa_find_space_by_number (int number)
8076 {
8077 sd_chain_struct *space_chain;
8078
8079 for (space_chain = space_dict_root;
8080 space_chain;
8081 space_chain = space_chain->sd_next)
8082 {
8083 if (SPACE_SPNUM (space_chain) == (unsigned int) number)
8084 return space_chain;
8085 }
8086
8087 /* No appropriate space found. Return NULL. */
8088 return NULL;
8089 }
8090
8091 /* Return the starting address for the given subspace. If the starting
8092 address is unknown then return zero. */
8093
8094 static unsigned int
8095 pa_subspace_start (sd_chain_struct *space, int quadrant)
8096 {
8097 /* FIXME. Assumes everyone puts read/write data at 0x4000000, this
8098 is not correct for the PA OSF1 port. */
8099 if ((strcmp (SPACE_NAME (space), "$PRIVATE$") == 0) && quadrant == 1)
8100 return 0x40000000;
8101 else if (space->sd_seg == data_section && quadrant == 1)
8102 return 0x40000000;
8103 else
8104 return 0;
8105 return 0;
8106 }
8107 #endif
8108
8109 /* Helper function for pa_stringer. Used to find the end of
8110 a string. */
8111
8112 static unsigned int
8113 pa_stringer_aux (char *s)
8114 {
8115 unsigned int c = *s & CHAR_MASK;
8116
8117 switch (c)
8118 {
8119 case '\"':
8120 c = NOT_A_CHAR;
8121 break;
8122 default:
8123 break;
8124 }
8125 return c;
8126 }
8127
8128 /* Handle a .STRING type pseudo-op. */
8129
8130 static void
8131 pa_stringer (int append_zero)
8132 {
8133 char *s, num_buf[4];
8134 unsigned int c;
8135 int i;
8136
8137 /* Preprocess the string to handle PA-specific escape sequences.
8138 For example, \xDD where DD is a hexadecimal number should be
8139 changed to \OOO where OOO is an octal number. */
8140
8141 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8142 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
8143 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8144 #endif
8145
8146 /* Skip the opening quote. */
8147 s = input_line_pointer + 1;
8148
8149 while (is_a_char (c = pa_stringer_aux (s++)))
8150 {
8151 if (c == '\\')
8152 {
8153 c = *s;
8154 switch (c)
8155 {
8156 /* Handle \x<num>. */
8157 case 'x':
8158 {
8159 unsigned int number;
8160 int num_digit;
8161 char dg;
8162 char *s_start = s;
8163
8164 /* Get past the 'x'. */
8165 s++;
8166 for (num_digit = 0, number = 0, dg = *s;
8167 num_digit < 2
8168 && (ISDIGIT (dg) || (dg >= 'a' && dg <= 'f')
8169 || (dg >= 'A' && dg <= 'F'));
8170 num_digit++)
8171 {
8172 if (ISDIGIT (dg))
8173 number = number * 16 + dg - '0';
8174 else if (dg >= 'a' && dg <= 'f')
8175 number = number * 16 + dg - 'a' + 10;
8176 else
8177 number = number * 16 + dg - 'A' + 10;
8178
8179 s++;
8180 dg = *s;
8181 }
8182 if (num_digit > 0)
8183 {
8184 switch (num_digit)
8185 {
8186 case 1:
8187 sprintf (num_buf, "%02o", number);
8188 break;
8189 case 2:
8190 sprintf (num_buf, "%03o", number);
8191 break;
8192 }
8193 for (i = 0; i <= num_digit; i++)
8194 s_start[i] = num_buf[i];
8195 }
8196 break;
8197 }
8198 /* This might be a "\"", skip over the escaped char. */
8199 default:
8200 s++;
8201 break;
8202 }
8203 }
8204 }
8205 stringer (8 + append_zero);
8206 pa_undefine_label ();
8207 }
8208
8209 /* Handle a .VERSION pseudo-op. */
8210
8211 static void
8212 pa_version (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8213 {
8214 obj_version (0);
8215 pa_undefine_label ();
8216 }
8217
8218 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8219
8220 /* Handle a .COMPILER pseudo-op. */
8221
8222 static void
8223 pa_compiler (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8224 {
8225 obj_som_compiler (0);
8226 pa_undefine_label ();
8227 }
8228
8229 #endif
8230
8231 /* Handle a .COPYRIGHT pseudo-op. */
8232
8233 static void
8234 pa_copyright (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8235 {
8236 obj_copyright (0);
8237 pa_undefine_label ();
8238 }
8239
8240 /* Just like a normal cons, but when finished we have to undefine
8241 the latest space label. */
8242
8243 static void
8244 pa_cons (int nbytes)
8245 {
8246 cons (nbytes);
8247 pa_undefine_label ();
8248 }
8249
8250 /* Like float_cons, but we need to undefine our label. */
8251
8252 static void
8253 pa_float_cons (int float_type)
8254 {
8255 float_cons (float_type);
8256 pa_undefine_label ();
8257 }
8258
8259 /* Like s_fill, but delete our label when finished. */
8260
8261 static void
8262 pa_fill (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8263 {
8264 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8265 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
8266 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8267 #endif
8268
8269 s_fill (0);
8270 pa_undefine_label ();
8271 }
8272
8273 /* Like lcomm, but delete our label when finished. */
8274
8275 static void
8276 pa_lcomm (int needs_align)
8277 {
8278 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8279 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
8280 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8281 #endif
8282
8283 s_lcomm (needs_align);
8284 pa_undefine_label ();
8285 }
8286
8287 /* Like lsym, but delete our label when finished. */
8288
8289 static void
8290 pa_lsym (int unused ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8291 {
8292 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8293 /* We must have a valid space and subspace. */
8294 pa_check_current_space_and_subspace ();
8295 #endif
8296
8297 s_lsym (0);
8298 pa_undefine_label ();
8299 }
8300
8301 /* This function is called once, at assembler startup time. It should
8302 set up all the tables, etc. that the MD part of the assembler will need. */
8303
8304 void
8305 md_begin (void)
8306 {
8307 const char *retval = NULL;
8308 int lose = 0;
8309 unsigned int i = 0;
8310
8311 last_call_info = NULL;
8312 call_info_root = NULL;
8313
8314 /* Set the default machine type. */
8315 if (!bfd_set_arch_mach (stdoutput, bfd_arch_hppa, DEFAULT_LEVEL))
8316 as_warn (_("could not set architecture and machine"));
8317
8318 /* Folding of text and data segments fails miserably on the PA.
8319 Warn user and disable "-R" option. */
8320 if (flag_readonly_data_in_text)
8321 {
8322 as_warn (_("-R option not supported on this target."));
8323 flag_readonly_data_in_text = 0;
8324 }
8325
8326 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8327 pa_spaces_begin ();
8328 #endif
8329
8330 op_hash = hash_new ();
8331
8332 while (i < NUMOPCODES)
8333 {
8334 const char *name = pa_opcodes[i].name;
8335
8336 retval = hash_insert (op_hash, name, (struct pa_opcode *) &pa_opcodes[i]);
8337 if (retval != NULL && *retval != '\0')
8338 {
8339 as_fatal (_("Internal error: can't hash `%s': %s\n"), name, retval);
8340 lose = 1;
8341 }
8342
8343 do
8344 {
8345 if ((pa_opcodes[i].match & pa_opcodes[i].mask)
8346 != pa_opcodes[i].match)
8347 {
8348 fprintf (stderr, _("internal error: losing opcode: `%s' \"%s\"\n"),
8349 pa_opcodes[i].name, pa_opcodes[i].args);
8350 lose = 1;
8351 }
8352 ++i;
8353 }
8354 while (i < NUMOPCODES && !strcmp (pa_opcodes[i].name, name));
8355 }
8356
8357 if (lose)
8358 as_fatal (_("Broken assembler. No assembly attempted."));
8359
8360 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8361 /* SOM will change text_section. To make sure we never put
8362 anything into the old one switch to the new one now. */
8363 subseg_set (text_section, 0);
8364 #endif
8365
8366 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8367 dummy_symbol = symbol_find_or_make ("L$dummy");
8368 S_SET_SEGMENT (dummy_symbol, text_section);
8369 /* Force the symbol to be converted to a real symbol. */
8370 symbol_get_bfdsym (dummy_symbol)->flags |= BSF_KEEP;
8371 #endif
8372 }
8373
8374 /* On the PA relocations which involve function symbols must not be
8375 adjusted. This so that the linker can know when/how to create argument
8376 relocation stubs for indirect calls and calls to static functions.
8377
8378 "T" field selectors create DLT relative fixups for accessing
8379 globals and statics in PIC code; each DLT relative fixup creates
8380 an entry in the DLT table. The entries contain the address of
8381 the final target (eg accessing "foo" would create a DLT entry
8382 with the address of "foo").
8383
8384 Unfortunately, the HP linker doesn't take into account any addend
8385 when generating the DLT; so accessing $LIT$+8 puts the address of
8386 $LIT$ into the DLT rather than the address of $LIT$+8.
8387
8388 The end result is we can't perform relocation symbol reductions for
8389 any fixup which creates entries in the DLT (eg they use "T" field
8390 selectors).
8391
8392 ??? Reject reductions involving symbols with external scope; such
8393 reductions make life a living hell for object file editors. */
8394
8395 int
8396 hppa_fix_adjustable (fixS *fixp)
8397 {
8398 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8399 reloc_type code;
8400 #endif
8401 struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fix;
8402
8403 hppa_fix = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixp->tc_fix_data;
8404
8405 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8406 /* LR/RR selectors are implicitly used for a number of different relocation
8407 types. We must ensure that none of these types are adjusted (see below)
8408 even if they occur with a different selector. */
8409 code = elf_hppa_reloc_final_type (stdoutput, fixp->fx_r_type,
8410 hppa_fix->fx_r_format,
8411 hppa_fix->fx_r_field);
8412
8413 switch (code)
8414 {
8415 /* Relocation types which use e_lrsel. */
8416 case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
8417 case R_PARISC_DLTREL21L:
8418 case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
8419 case R_PARISC_PLTOFF21L:
8420
8421 /* Relocation types which use e_rrsel. */
8422 case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
8423 case R_PARISC_DIR14DR:
8424 case R_PARISC_DIR14WR:
8425 case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
8426 case R_PARISC_DLTREL14R:
8427 case R_PARISC_DLTREL14DR:
8428 case R_PARISC_DLTREL14WR:
8429 case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
8430 case R_PARISC_DPREL14DR:
8431 case R_PARISC_DPREL14WR:
8432 case R_PARISC_PLTOFF14R:
8433 case R_PARISC_PLTOFF14DR:
8434 case R_PARISC_PLTOFF14WR:
8435
8436 /* Other types that we reject for reduction. */
8437 case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
8438 case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
8439 return 0;
8440 default:
8441 break;
8442 }
8443 #endif
8444
8445 /* Reject reductions of symbols in sym1-sym2 expressions when
8446 the fixup will occur in a CODE subspace.
8447
8448 XXX FIXME: Long term we probably want to reject all of these;
8449 for example reducing in the debug section would lose if we ever
8450 supported using the optimizing hp linker. */
8451 if (fixp->fx_addsy
8452 && fixp->fx_subsy
8453 && (hppa_fix->segment->flags & SEC_CODE))
8454 return 0;
8455
8456 /* We can't adjust any relocs that use LR% and RR% field selectors.
8457
8458 If a symbol is reduced to a section symbol, the assembler will
8459 adjust the addend unless the symbol happens to reside right at
8460 the start of the section. Additionally, the linker has no choice
8461 but to manipulate the addends when coalescing input sections for
8462 "ld -r". Since an LR% field selector is defined to round the
8463 addend, we can't change the addend without risking that a LR% and
8464 it's corresponding (possible multiple) RR% field will no longer
8465 sum to the right value.
8466
8467 eg. Suppose we have
8468 . ldil LR%foo+0,%r21
8469 . ldw RR%foo+0(%r21),%r26
8470 . ldw RR%foo+4(%r21),%r25
8471
8472 If foo is at address 4092 (decimal) in section `sect', then after
8473 reducing to the section symbol we get
8474 . LR%sect+4092 == (L%sect)+0
8475 . RR%sect+4092 == (R%sect)+4092
8476 . RR%sect+4096 == (R%sect)-4096
8477 and the last address loses because rounding the addend to 8k
8478 multiples takes us up to 8192 with an offset of -4096.
8479
8480 In cases where the LR% expression is identical to the RR% one we
8481 will never have a problem, but is so happens that gcc rounds
8482 addends involved in LR% field selectors to work around a HP
8483 linker bug. ie. We often have addresses like the last case
8484 above where the LR% expression is offset from the RR% one. */
8485
8486 if (hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_lrsel
8487 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_rrsel
8488 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_nlrsel)
8489 return 0;
8490
8491 /* Reject reductions of symbols in DLT relative relocs,
8492 relocations with plabels. */
8493 if (hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_tsel
8494 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_ltsel
8495 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_rtsel
8496 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_psel
8497 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_rpsel
8498 || hppa_fix->fx_r_field == e_lpsel)
8499 return 0;
8500
8501 /* Reject absolute calls (jumps). */
8502 if (hppa_fix->fx_r_type == R_HPPA_ABS_CALL)
8503 return 0;
8504
8505 /* Reject reductions of function symbols. */
8506 if (fixp->fx_addsy != 0 && S_IS_FUNCTION (fixp->fx_addsy))
8507 return 0;
8508
8509 return 1;
8510 }
8511
8512 /* Return nonzero if the fixup in FIXP will require a relocation,
8513 even it if appears that the fixup could be completely handled
8514 within GAS. */
8515
8516 int
8517 hppa_force_relocation (struct fix *fixp)
8518 {
8519 struct hppa_fix_struct *hppa_fixp;
8520
8521 hppa_fixp = (struct hppa_fix_struct *) fixp->tc_fix_data;
8522 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8523 if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_ENTRY
8524 || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_EXIT
8525 || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_BEGIN_BRTAB
8526 || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_END_BRTAB
8527 || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_BEGIN_TRY
8528 || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_END_TRY
8529 || (fixp->fx_addsy != NULL && fixp->fx_subsy != NULL
8530 && (hppa_fixp->segment->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0))
8531 return 1;
8532 #endif
8533 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8534 if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT
8535 || fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY)
8536 return 1;
8537 #endif
8538
8539 gas_assert (fixp->fx_addsy != NULL);
8540
8541 /* Ensure we emit a relocation for global symbols so that dynamic
8542 linking works. */
8543 if (S_FORCE_RELOC (fixp->fx_addsy, 1))
8544 return 1;
8545
8546 /* It is necessary to force PC-relative calls/jumps to have a relocation
8547 entry if they're going to need either an argument relocation or long
8548 call stub. */
8549 if (fixp->fx_pcrel
8550 && arg_reloc_stub_needed (symbol_arg_reloc_info (fixp->fx_addsy),
8551 hppa_fixp->fx_arg_reloc))
8552 return 1;
8553
8554 /* Now check to see if we're going to need a long-branch stub. */
8555 if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_PCREL_CALL)
8556 {
8557 long pc = md_pcrel_from (fixp);
8558 valueT distance, min_stub_distance;
8559
8560 distance = fixp->fx_offset + S_GET_VALUE (fixp->fx_addsy) - pc - 8;
8561
8562 /* Distance to the closest possible stub. This will detect most
8563 but not all circumstances where a stub will not work. */
8564 min_stub_distance = pc + 16;
8565 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8566 if (last_call_info != NULL)
8567 min_stub_distance -= S_GET_VALUE (last_call_info->start_symbol);
8568 #endif
8569
8570 if ((distance + 8388608 >= 16777216
8571 && min_stub_distance <= 8388608)
8572 || (hppa_fixp->fx_r_format == 17
8573 && distance + 262144 >= 524288
8574 && min_stub_distance <= 262144)
8575 || (hppa_fixp->fx_r_format == 12
8576 && distance + 8192 >= 16384
8577 && min_stub_distance <= 8192)
8578 )
8579 return 1;
8580 }
8581
8582 if (fixp->fx_r_type == (int) R_HPPA_ABS_CALL)
8583 return 1;
8584
8585 /* No need (yet) to force another relocations to be emitted. */
8586 return 0;
8587 }
8588
8589 /* Now for some ELF specific code. FIXME. */
8590 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8591 /* For ELF, this function serves one purpose: to setup the st_size
8592 field of STT_FUNC symbols. To do this, we need to scan the
8593 call_info structure list, determining st_size in by taking the
8594 difference in the address of the beginning/end marker symbols. */
8595
8596 void
8597 elf_hppa_final_processing (void)
8598 {
8599 struct call_info *call_info_pointer;
8600
8601 for (call_info_pointer = call_info_root;
8602 call_info_pointer;
8603 call_info_pointer = call_info_pointer->ci_next)
8604 {
8605 elf_symbol_type *esym
8606 = ((elf_symbol_type *)
8607 symbol_get_bfdsym (call_info_pointer->start_symbol));
8608 esym->internal_elf_sym.st_size =
8609 S_GET_VALUE (call_info_pointer->end_symbol)
8610 - S_GET_VALUE (call_info_pointer->start_symbol) + 4;
8611 }
8612 }
8613
8614 static void
8615 pa_vtable_entry (int ignore ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8616 {
8617 struct fix *new_fix;
8618
8619 new_fix = obj_elf_vtable_entry (0);
8620
8621 if (new_fix)
8622 {
8623 struct hppa_fix_struct * hppa_fix = obstack_alloc (&notes, sizeof (struct hppa_fix_struct));
8624
8625 hppa_fix->fx_r_type = R_HPPA;
8626 hppa_fix->fx_r_field = e_fsel;
8627 hppa_fix->fx_r_format = 32;
8628 hppa_fix->fx_arg_reloc = 0;
8629 hppa_fix->segment = now_seg;
8630 new_fix->tc_fix_data = (void *) hppa_fix;
8631 new_fix->fx_r_type = (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY;
8632 }
8633 }
8634
8635 static void
8636 pa_vtable_inherit (int ignore ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
8637 {
8638 struct fix *new_fix;
8639
8640 new_fix = obj_elf_vtable_inherit (0);
8641
8642 if (new_fix)
8643 {
8644 struct hppa_fix_struct * hppa_fix = obstack_alloc (&notes, sizeof (struct hppa_fix_struct));
8645
8646 hppa_fix->fx_r_type = R_HPPA;
8647 hppa_fix->fx_r_field = e_fsel;
8648 hppa_fix->fx_r_format = 32;
8649 hppa_fix->fx_arg_reloc = 0;
8650 hppa_fix->segment = now_seg;
8651 new_fix->tc_fix_data = (void *) hppa_fix;
8652 new_fix->fx_r_type = (int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT;
8653 }
8654 }
8655 #endif
8656
8657 /* Table of pseudo ops for the PA. FIXME -- how many of these
8658 are now redundant with the overall GAS and the object file
8659 dependent tables? */
8660 const pseudo_typeS md_pseudo_table[] =
8661 {
8662 /* align pseudo-ops on the PA specify the actual alignment requested,
8663 not the log2 of the requested alignment. */
8664 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8665 {"align", pa_align, 8},
8666 #endif
8667 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8668 {"align", s_align_bytes, 8},
8669 #endif
8670 {"begin_brtab", pa_brtab, 1},
8671 {"begin_try", pa_try, 1},
8672 {"block", pa_block, 1},
8673 {"blockz", pa_block, 0},
8674 {"byte", pa_cons, 1},
8675 {"call", pa_call, 0},
8676 {"callinfo", pa_callinfo, 0},
8677 #if defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD))
8678 {"code", obj_elf_text, 0},
8679 #else
8680 {"code", pa_text, 0},
8681 {"comm", pa_comm, 0},
8682 #endif
8683 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8684 {"compiler", pa_compiler, 0},
8685 #endif
8686 {"copyright", pa_copyright, 0},
8687 #if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
8688 {"data", pa_data, 0},
8689 #endif
8690 {"double", pa_float_cons, 'd'},
8691 {"dword", pa_cons, 8},
8692 {"end", pa_end, 0},
8693 {"end_brtab", pa_brtab, 0},
8694 #if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
8695 {"end_try", pa_try, 0},
8696 #endif
8697 {"enter", pa_enter, 0},
8698 {"entry", pa_entry, 0},
8699 {"equ", pa_equ, 0},
8700 {"exit", pa_exit, 0},
8701 {"export", pa_export, 0},
8702 {"fill", pa_fill, 0},
8703 {"float", pa_float_cons, 'f'},
8704 {"half", pa_cons, 2},
8705 {"import", pa_import, 0},
8706 {"int", pa_cons, 4},
8707 {"label", pa_label, 0},
8708 {"lcomm", pa_lcomm, 0},
8709 {"leave", pa_leave, 0},
8710 {"level", pa_level, 0},
8711 {"long", pa_cons, 4},
8712 {"lsym", pa_lsym, 0},
8713 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8714 {"nsubspa", pa_subspace, 1},
8715 #endif
8716 {"octa", pa_cons, 16},
8717 {"org", pa_origin, 0},
8718 {"origin", pa_origin, 0},
8719 {"param", pa_param, 0},
8720 {"proc", pa_proc, 0},
8721 {"procend", pa_procend, 0},
8722 {"quad", pa_cons, 8},
8723 {"reg", pa_equ, 1},
8724 {"short", pa_cons, 2},
8725 {"single", pa_float_cons, 'f'},
8726 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8727 {"space", pa_space, 0},
8728 {"spnum", pa_spnum, 0},
8729 #endif
8730 {"string", pa_stringer, 0},
8731 {"stringz", pa_stringer, 1},
8732 #ifdef OBJ_SOM
8733 {"subspa", pa_subspace, 0},
8734 #endif
8735 #if !(defined (OBJ_ELF) && (defined (TE_LINUX) || defined (TE_NetBSD)))
8736 {"text", pa_text, 0},
8737 #endif
8738 {"version", pa_version, 0},
8739 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8740 {"vtable_entry", pa_vtable_entry, 0},
8741 {"vtable_inherit", pa_vtable_inherit, 0},
8742 #endif
8743 {"word", pa_cons, 4},
8744 {NULL, 0, 0}
8745 };
8746
8747 #ifdef OBJ_ELF
8748 void
8749 hppa_cfi_frame_initial_instructions (void)
8750 {
8751 cfi_add_CFA_def_cfa (30, 0);
8752 }
8753
8754 int
8755 hppa_regname_to_dw2regnum (char *regname)
8756 {
8757 unsigned int regnum = -1;
8758 unsigned int i;
8759 const char *p;
8760 char *q;
8761 static struct { char *name; int dw2regnum; } regnames[] =
8762 {
8763 { "sp", 30 }, { "rp", 2 },
8764 };
8765
8766 for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE (regnames); ++i)
8767 if (strcmp (regnames[i].name, regname) == 0)
8768 return regnames[i].dw2regnum;
8769
8770 if (regname[0] == 'r')
8771 {
8772 p = regname + 1;
8773 regnum = strtoul (p, &q, 10);
8774 if (p == q || *q || regnum >= 32)
8775 return -1;
8776 }
8777 else if (regname[0] == 'f' && regname[1] == 'r')
8778 {
8779 p = regname + 2;
8780 regnum = strtoul (p, &q, 10);
8781 #if TARGET_ARCH_SIZE == 64
8782 if (p == q || *q || regnum <= 4 || regnum >= 32)
8783 return -1;
8784 regnum += 32 - 4;
8785 #else
8786 if (p == q
8787 || (*q && ((*q != 'L' && *q != 'R') || *(q + 1)))
8788 || regnum <= 4 || regnum >= 32)
8789 return -1;
8790 regnum = (regnum - 4) * 2 + 32;
8791 if (*q == 'R')
8792 regnum++;
8793 #endif
8794 }
8795 return regnum;
8796 }
8797 #endif
This page took 0.307347 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.